Quarterlytics / Technology / Idox

Idox

idox · LSE Technology
Claim this profile
Ticker idox
Exchange LSE
Sector Technology
Industry
Employees 501-1000
← All annual reports
FY2019 Annual Report · Idox
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
IDOX PLC 
ANNUAL REPORT & ACCOUNTS 2019 

Company Number: 03984070 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Contents 

Strategic Report 

1     Financial and Operational Highlights 
3     Chairman’s Statement 
6     Strategy, Market Overview and Business Model 
9     Chief Executive’s Review 
13   Financial Review 
19   Principal Risks and Uncertainties  

Governance 

24   Board of Directors 
25   Directors’ Report 
30   Corporate Governance Report 
37   Directors’ Responsibilities Statement 
38   Report of the Audit Committee 

Financial Statements 

43   Independent Auditor’s Report to the Members of Idox plc 
54   Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income 
55   Consolidated Balance Sheet 
56   Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity 
57   Consolidated Cash Flow Statement 
58   Notes to the Accounts 
102 Company Balance Sheet 
103 Company Statement of Changes in Equity 
104 Notes to the Company Financial Statements 

 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
Company Information 

Company Secretary and Registered Office:  R Paterson 

Nominated Adviser and Broker: 

Auditor: 

Corporate Solicitors: 

Registrars: 

2nd Floor 
1310 Waterside 
Arlington Business Park 
Theale 
Reading 
RG7 4SA 

Peel Hunt LLP 
Moor House 
120 London Wall 
London 
EC2Y 5ET 

Deloitte LLP 
Statutory Auditor 
110 Queen Street 
Glasgow 
G1 3BX 

Pinsent Masons LLP 
30 Crown Place 
Earl Street 
London 
EC2A 4ES 

Neville Registrars Ltd 
Neville House 
Steelpark Road 
Halesowen 
B62 8HD 

Company Registration Number: 

03984070 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Strategic Report - Financial and Operational Highlights 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Idox plc (AIM: IDOX), a leading supplier of specialist information management software and solutions to the public and 
asset intensive sectors, is pleased to report its financial results for the year ended 31 October 2019. 

Idox along with most companies has been impacted by the emerging Covid-19 pandemic. We continue to assess the 
impact of the Covid-19 pandemic on the business, taking actions to mitigate or limit the impacts on our organisation 
where we can and supporting our staff, customers and partners in dealing with the emerging situation. As part of the 
preparation of our FY19 results, the Group has carefully assessed the likely impact of the Covid-19 pandemic on our 
business  and  considered  specifically  changes  in  the  way  we  engage  with  our  customers,  staff,  supply  chains  and 
banking partners. Idox is fundamentally resilient to the Covid-19 pandemic due to the Group's high recurring revenue 
base, its focus on  public sector markets  and the  high proportion of staff that routinely  work from home. The Group 
retains significant liquidity with cash and available committed bank facilities and has strong headroom against financial 
covenants. We continue to monitor the situation as it continues to evolve and adapt our approach as required. 

Financial highlights: 

  Revenue of £65.5m (2018: £66.4m for continuing business, restated for prior year adjustments as disclosed 

in note 1). 

  Revenue visibility significantly improved, with annualised recurring revenue run rate at 31 October 2019 up 

20% to £38.9m following adoption of IFRS 15 (16% organic). 

  Order book for contracted software and services up 29% to £12.1m.  

  Adjusted EBITDA*: £14.4m (2018: £13.6m, restated) for continuing business. Adjusted EBITDA* margin 

improved to 22% (2018: 20%, restated). 

  Cash conversion of Adjusted EBITDA* to net cash from operating activities improved to 86% (2018: 72%, 

restated). Free cashflow of £4.4m (2018: £4.2m inflow). 

  Adjusted EPS** for continuing operations 1.30p (2018: 2.23p, restated). 

  Net debt*** at 31 October 2019 down 17% at £26.4m (2018: £31.8m). 

  Post year end, new banking arrangements put in place for a £35m, three-year revolving credit facility. 

Statutory Equivalents 
Reconciliations between adjusted and statutory earnings are contained within these financial statements (page 54). 
The statutory equivalents of the above results are as follows: 

  Loss  before  tax  £0.03m  (2018:  £30.2m  loss,  restated)  for  continuing  operations,  including  an  impairment 

charge of £Nil (2018: £33.3m). Loss before tax on discontinued operations of £0.6m (2018: £9.7m). 

  Basic EPS loss of 0.26p (2018: loss 6.67p, restated) for continuing operations. Basic EPS loss of 0.14p (2018: 

loss 2.19p) on discontinued operations. 

Alternative Performance Measures 
These items are excluded from statutory measures of profit to present a measure of cash earnings from underlying activities on an 
ongoing basis. This is a standard methodology in the capital markets in which we operate and how management, shareholders and 
other stakeholders track performance. 

* Adjusted EBITDA is defined as earnings before amortisation, depreciation, restructuring, acquisition costs, impairment, financing 
costs and share option costs. Share option costs are excluded from Adjusted EBITDA as this is a standard measure in the industry 
and how management and our shareholders track performance. 

** Adjusted profit before tax and adjusted EPS excludes amortisation on acquired intangibles, restructuring, financing, impairment 
and acquisition costs.  

*** Net debt is defined as cash less third party borrowings less long term bond. 

1 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Strategic Report - Financial and Operational Highlights (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Operational highlights: 

  New  Board,  new  senior  management  and  finance  teams,  with  improved  accounting  practices;  enhanced 
employee, customer and shareholder engagement; full integration of prior period acquisitions; and improved 
governance throughout the organisation.  

  Disposed  of  our  loss-making  Digital  business  in  November  2018  which  was  classed  as  discontinued 

operations in the prior year accounts. 

  Settled a number of operational legacy issues, including disposal of surplus offices, resolved all outstanding 
material litigation, resolved a number of customer disputes and initiated focus on recurring revenue, ceased 
loss-making  or  unsustainable  products,  and  secured  long-term  supply  arrangements  with  a  number  of  key 
software partners. 

  Acquired Tascomi, a cloud-native supplier of solutions to our core Local Authority property and environmental 
services markets, in July 2019 to enhance the Group's technological capabilities and market leading positions. 
The acquisition was funded by a £7.4m equity placing. 

  Established new sales and marketing methodologies to identify our strongest markets and align existing and 

new resources to maximise the growth opportunities we are presented with.  

  A continued focus on managing costs to drive increased profitability, and a focus on achieving positive trading 

terms with our partners to ensure a high level of cash conversion and generation from our operations. 

David Meaden, Chief Executive of Idox said: 

“This  has  been  a  turnaround  year  for  Idox.  We  enter  FY20  on  a  sound  footing  having  secured  new  financing 
arrangements, reduced debt, improved recurring income and overhauled our governance structures, addressing the 
material legacy issues impacting the Group over the previous 18 months. Our attention is now focussed on customer 
and employee engagement, growing in our chosen markets and improving margins and cash. We have strong products 
that are essential for high performing organisations, including our large portfolio of public bodies, seeking to modernise 
and transform the way they deliver their services. 

Cash conversion in the Group has improved notably within the year compared to prior periods, as our revenues and 
profit are closer linked to services we provide and so more tightly aligned to payments the Group receives for work 
delivered to our customers. Following the improvements seen in FY19, the Board has full confidence in the Group’s 
future prospects and currently intends to introduce a final dividend in respect of the year ending 31 October 2020. 

We  have  a  high  degree  of  confidence  that  we  will  continue  to  create  value  at  Idox  for  employees,  customers, 
shareholders and other stakeholders as we build on the achievements of FY19 and deliver on the ambitious targets we 
have set ourselves for FY20 and beyond”. 

2 

 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
Strategic Report - Chairman’s Statement 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Introduction 
I joined our company as Chairman in November 2018, and reflected that the financial year ending in October of that 
year had been very busy, with the management team and Board spending a lot of time on issues that needed to be 
resolved for the good of all of our stakeholders, but which were not directly linked to delivering value for our customers. 

More recently Idox along with most companies has been impacted by the emerging Covid-19 pandemic. We continue 
to assess the impact of the Covid-19 pandemic on the business, taking actions to mitigate or limit the impacts on our 
organisation where we can and supporting our staff, customers and partners in dealing with the emerging situation.  

Idox is a very resilient business, as the core of our Group operates in public sector markets which we anticipate will 
continue to be robust; in the normal course of business a high proportion of staff are long-term homeworkers meaning 
the  challenges  and  impact  of  the  switch  to  predominantly  remote  working  is  much  lower  than  for  many  other 
organisations. In addition, we have high levels of recurring and repeating revenues, and can continue to deliver products 
and services remotely with no need for physical contact. We also have significant headroom in our banking facilities 
following the successful re-negotiation that was completed on 19 December 2019. We therefore remain very vigilant 
as to the impact of the pandemic, and we are in a strong operational and trading position to react as necessary. Further 
details regarding the impact of the Covid-19 pandemic and the Group’s response are provided in the Going Concern 
disclosures in the Directors’ Report on pages 28 and 29. 

As  the  year  ended  31  October  2019  has  unrolled,  further  issues  relating  to  historic  accounting  and  management 
practices  emerged,  resulting  in  various  prior  period  restatements  and  a  number  of  improvements  to  our  overall 
governance and controls framework as detailed in our Audit Committee Report and notes to our financial statements. 
I am pleased to say that, following the audit, all of these issues have been dealt with effectively, and all the indicators, 
the balance between order book, utilisation, revenue and cash, tell us that there are no more of these historical issues 
to emerge. I understand the frustration of our shareholders that we have had to spend so much time on these legacy 
issues, and that they have consequently impacted our expected performance, but I am happy to report that we are at 
the end of this phase of the Idox story. Our Executive Management Team (EMT) has done an excellent job in working 
through the issues, dealing with them quickly and in a transparent way, and putting the business on a good footing to 
go forwards. 

A major component of the stabilisation programme has been a significant upgrade in our management team. We have 
welcomed new colleagues to lead our Finance, Software Development, Operations and Sales organisations, and as a 
result, we have a much stronger team, with the skills and experience to drive the business forwards as we focus on the 
core of our business, building and delivering products and services that deliver clear value for our customers. This is 
not a new strategy. As I stated in last year’s Annual Report, our strategy of building discrete software and software 
enabled services businesses around specific Intellectual Property (IP) assets has allowed us to build market leading 
positions  in  a  number  of  very  attractive  market  segments,  where  we  enjoy  the  benefits  of  delivering  differentiated 
products and services to customers that deliver tangible and lasting value for them. This has led to us building long 
lasting relationships based on mutual value creation. The power of such a niche strategy is evident in the length of 
many of our relationships, the depth of penetration in the segments we target, and the margins that we enjoy as a result 
of the differentiated value that we deliver. Now that we have dealt with the distractions, and associated cost burdens, 
of the legacy issues, we can concentrate on doubling down on this strategy, and expect to see the benefits of that focus 
lead to a significant improvement in our own margins. 

Last year I wrote in my report about disposing of businesses that had been acquired that did not fit our model. This 
year I am very pleased to report that, in contrast, we have completed an acquisition that fits our model perfectly. We 
are thrilled that, with our shareholders support, we have  been  able to complete the acquisition of Tascomi Limited. 
Tascomi is a business that has been built from the ground up as a very flexible, cloud-native software business, with 
its core applications targeted at our markets of Land and Property management. This is an essential direction of travel 
for the Group and bringing the Tascomi business together with our existing operations will accelerate our own progress 
to the cloud significantly, as well as adding some very talented engineers to our teams. We are very pleased to welcome 
them all to the Group. 

As with all rebuilding programmes, there is a huge amount of work that goes on in the background to get the foundations 
right. The benefits of these improvements are not immediately obvious, but it is essential to put the time and effort in 
to get this stage right so that the value we all want from the further, more obvious work, can be realised. I believe we 
are now at this stage. 

3 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Strategic Report - Chairman’s Statement (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Group Strategy 
The Group continued its focus on providing digital solutions and services to the public sector in the United Kingdom, 
complemented by our Content business in Europe and Engineering Information Management (EIM) business servicing 
customers  across  the  world.  The  key  to  our  success  is  to  ensure  we  deliver  better  user  results  and  productivity 
improvements  for  customers  through  focusing  on  usability,  functionality  and  application  of  integrated  digital  and 
increasingly cloud-based technologies and solutions. 

As a result of the work described above to fully rectify the legacy problems and deal with the challenges the Group has 
faced in the year, the Board believes that our business will progress very positively now with a strong improvement in 
margins and cash generation. We operate in very good markets, with excellent market positions and insights, and we 
have every confidence that we can continue to deliver growing value from these positions for our customers and all 
other stakeholders. 

Board  
FY19 has seen a number of changes to the Board of Directors: 

  On  1  November  2018,  Rob  Grubb  joined  us  as  Chief  Financial  Officer.  Rob  has  brought  strong  relevant 
experience  of  leading  the  finance  function  of  a  publicly  quoted  technology  business,  having  been  CFO  of 
Gresham Technologies from 2009 to 2018.  

  On 1 November 2018, Oliver Scott was appointed as a Non-Executive Director, and Chair of the Nomination 
Committee. Oliver is a founding Partner of Kestrel LLP, a fund management business which currently holds 
approximately 10.13% of Idox shares.  

  On the 19th November 2018, Laurence Vaughan resigned from the Board with immediate effect. Following 

this, I was appointed to the position of Chairman on 22 November 2018. 

  On 29 March 2019, Barbara Moorhouse stepped down from the Board following the Group's Annual General 
Meeting (AGM) having completed her three year term of office in January 2019. I would like to thank Barbara 
for her contribution to Idox since 2016 and in particular her work as Chair of the Remuneration Committee 
from December 2018.  

  On 29 March 2019, Phil Kelly was appointed as a Non-Executive Director, and Chair of the Remuneration 
Committee. Phil has served as a non-executive director of several listed and private companies in the software 
and related services sector, and is currently a non-executive director of Castleton Technology plc.  

  On 3 April 2019, Richard Kellett-Clarke stepped down from the Board. I would like to thank Richard for his 

contribution to Idox in both Executive and Non-Executive roles dating back to 2005. 

In addition to the changes listed above, Jeremy Millard has continued in his role as Non-Executive Director, and Chair 
of the Audit Committee throughout FY19.    

Each member of the Board brings different skills and experience to the Board and the Board Committees and I am 
pleased with this balance which has supported the effectiveness of the Board throughout FY19. 

I  am  satisfied  that  there  is  sufficient  diversity  in  the  Board  structure  to  bring  a  balance  of  skills,  experience, 
independence  and  knowledge  to  the  Group  however  I  intend  to  keep  this  balance  under  review  and  continued 
assessment. 

Corporate Governance 
We are cognisant of the important responsibilities we have in respect of Corporate Governance and shaping our culture 
to be consistent with our objectives, strategy and business model which we set out in our Strategic Report and our 
description of principal risks and uncertainties. The Group is committed to conducting its business fairly, impartially, in 
an ethical and proper manner, and in full compliance with all laws and regulations. In conducting our business, integrity 
is the foundation of all Company relationships, including those with customers, suppliers, communities and employees.  

4 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Strategic Report - Chairman’s Statement (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Acquisitions 
As  highlighted  above,  during  the  financial  year  the  acquisition  of  Tascomi  Limited  was  completed  in  line  with  our 
strategy. Tascomi represents an expansion of our Local Government offerings and creates synergies and opportunities 
for cost savings in existing products within the Group, which have contributed in a small part to this year’s financial 
results. The Board believes Tascomi will deliver earnings enhancing contributions in future periods. 

The acquisition was funded by means of a placing of new shares which raised gross proceeds of £7.4 million. 

Dividends 
The Board has decided no final dividend will be paid (2018: £Nil) for FY19 bringing the total for the year to £Nil (2018: 
£Nil). This decision was reached after a full consideration of the pace of recovery in our business. 

Following the improvements seen in the Group in FY19, the Board has full confidence in the Group’s future prospects 
and currently intends to introduce a final dividend in respect of the year ending 31 October 2020. 

Summary and Outlook 
Although this financial year did not turn out exactly as anticipated, the fundamental plan and strategy have held up as 
expected.  The  Group  enjoys  an  exceptionally  strong  market  position  in  the  public  sector,  good  products,  and  has 
opportunities for growth and improving financial performance.  

The new leadership team has made a great start to the new financial year, delivering a strong first quarter of trading 
and securing new long-term bank facilities. I am confident of the Group’s future prospects. 

Finally,  I  would  like  to  extend  my  thanks  to  the  entire  workforce  of  the  Group,  who  have  maintained  their  focus  on 
looking after the most important asset of our business, our customers. Our colleague’s expertise and diligence have 
continued to deliver the support and value that our customers expect, and we are fortunate to have them choose Idox. 

Chris Stone 
Chairman 
9 April 2020

5 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Strategic Report – Strategy, Market Overview and Business Model  

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Strategy 
The Group continued its focus on its purpose of providing digital solutions and services to the public sector in the United 
Kingdom,  complimented  by  our  Content  business  in  Europe  and  Engineering  Information  Management  business 
servicing customers across the world. The key to our success is to ensure we deliver better user results and productivity 
improvements for customers through focusing on usability, functionality and application of integrated digital and cloud-
based technologies and solutions. 

Market Overview  
The  Group  continues  to  operate  successfully  in  challenging  markets  characterised  by  continued  pressure  on 
expenditure. Our diversity of offerings and integration of businesses into a single management structure allows us to 
take advantage of opportunities and respond to challenges in our markets.  

We see no change in outlook for our core markets. Recent announcements from all main political parties concerning 
increased public sector spend are in line with our planning and expectations and should result in increased demand for 
our solutions which provide improved processes, cost savings and efficiencies to our customers in our chosen markets. 
Demand in both the markets that our EIM and Content businesses operate in remains robust, and we are confident the 
operational improvements we have made in FY19 and continue to execute will allow us to capitalise on this demand. 

Our Business Model 
Idox  is  the  leading  applications  provider  to  UK  Local  Government  for  core  functions  relating  to  land,  people  and 
property,  including  market  leading  planning  systems  and  election  management  software.  Over  90%  of  UK  local 
authorities are now customers for one or more of the Group’s products. In addition, the Group’s public sector products 
are complimented by our Content business in Europe and Engineering Information Management business servicing 
customers across the world.  

Idox provides: 

 

 

 

public sector organisations with tools to manage information and knowledge, documents, content, business 
processes and workflow as well as connecting directly with the citizen via the web and providing elections 
management solutions; 

decision support content such as grants and planning policy information and corporate compliance services; 
and 

engineering document control, project collaboration and facility management applications to many leading 
companies in industries such as oil and gas, architecture and construction, mining, utilities, pharmaceuticals 
and transportation in North America and around the world. 

The Group employs 666 colleagues located in the UK, the USA, Europe and India. 

The Group’s business model provides the framework to support our strategic objectives to create shareholder value 
specifically and improve stakeholder engagement more generally. These stakeholders include employees, creditors, 
finance lenders, other business partners, and the local and national communities we are part of. 

We  create  value  through  the  efforts  of  our  employees,  supported  by  these  stakeholders,  principally  through  the 
development and commercialisation of software products and other IP-rich content. 

The risks and uncertainties we face in building value for shareholders and stakeholders is set out in the Principal Risks 
and Uncertainties section of this Strategic Report.   

6 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Strategic Report – Strategy, Market Overview and Business Model (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Key Performance Indicators 
Key financial performance indicators measure our effectiveness of executing our stated business model to deliver our 
strategy and therefore build value for shareholders and other stakeholders. 

These are monitored on an ongoing basis by management and are set out below. 

2019 

2018 

Excluding Digital* 
2018 
2019 

Measure 
(see note 1 for restatement) 

Revenue 

Group Revenue 

£65.5m 

£72.6m 

£66.5m 

£66.4m  Revenue received from provision of goods and 

Annualised Recurring 
Revenue (ARR) exit run-
rate 

£38.9m 

£36.3m 

£38.9m 

£32.4m 

Profitability ratios 

Adjusted EBITDA 

£14.4m 

£10.8m 

£14.4m 

£13.6m 

Adjusted EBITDA margin 

22% 

15% 

22% 

20% 

Adjusted EPS 

1.15p 

1.67p 

1.30p 

2.23p 

services. 
Annualised recurring revenue at 31 October that 
is contracted or considered highly likely to recur in 
subsequent years.  

This is calculated by multiplying the last month of 
the financial year (October) by 12 to provide an 
annualised run-rate.  

Profit before interest, tax, depreciation, 
amortisation, restructuring costs, acquisition 
costs, impairment, financing costs and share 
option costs. 

Profit before interest, tax, depreciation, 
amortisation, restructuring costs, acquisition 
costs, impairment, financing costs and share 
option costs as a percentage of revenue. 

Adjusted EPS excludes amortisation on acquired 
intangibles, impairment, acquisition costs, 
restructuring costs, financing costs and share 
options costs. 

Cash indicators 

Free Cash flow 

£4.4m 

£4.2m 

£4.4m 

£6.0m 

Net Debt 

(£26.4m) 

(£31.8m) 

n/a 

n/a 

Net cashflow excluding: acquisitions, debt 
repayments & drawdowns, and shareholder 
placing & dividends. 
Borrowing plus Bonds in issue, less cash and 
cash equivalents. 

* The Group disposed of its Digital Business on 2 November 2018 

Alternative Performance Measures 
Where relevant, adjusted measures of profit have been used alongside statutory definitions. The main items that are 
added back to statutory profit are: 

  Amortisation from acquired intangible assets. 

 

Impairment. 

  Restructuring costs. 

  Acquisition and financing costs. 

  Share option costs. 

These items are excluded from statutory measures of profit to present a measure of cash earnings from underlying 
activities on an ongoing basis. This is a standard methodology in the capital markets in which we operate and how 
management, shareholders and other stakeholders track performance. 

7 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Strategic Report – Strategy, Market Overview and Business Model (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Non-financial Indicators 
In addition to the financial indicators, the Group is working on establishing employee-related KPI’s, recognising our 
employees are central to the Group’s efforts. Measurement of our ability to attract and retain the best talent is important 
to understand our performance in delivering our strategy and creating value for shareholders and other stakeholders.  

Idox  Group  practices  an  integrated  management  system  centred  around  gaining  and  retaining  ISO  accreditations. 
These are internally and externally audited annually to ensure compliance. 

Composition of the Board 
The Board of Directors has no female Directors. There is diversity in the Board structure to bring a balance of skills, 
experience, independence and knowledge to the Group, however, this balance is subject to ongoing review and further 
assessment. 

8 

 
 
 
 
 
 
Strategic Report – Chief Executive’s Review 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Overview 
It  has  been  an  intense  and  transformative  year  at  Idox.  The  Chairman  has  referenced  the  unexpected  issues  that 
emerged. It has required a very determined and focussed effort from a talented group of people to lead the business 
through this set of circumstances and I am grateful to the newly constituted EMT for embracing the challenge so readily 
and for their hard work and single-minded approach. That we have been able to address the issues so effectively and 
establish a strong basis for future success has required a commitment and focus across the Group and I would like to 
record my own thanks for the engagement of all our staff and their commitment to creating value for our clients during 
this period.  

We have been determined to restore the fortunes of the Group by having a laser like focus on the areas where we 
create distinctive value. As such, the year saw us dispose of the Digital business that required a series of bespoke, 
non-repeatable solutions and add the market leading, repeatable SaaS solution provided by Tascomi to our offerings 
in regulatory and licencing services. We believe these activities are important in the key Local Government market and 
support our future growth plans. 

During the year we have continued to focus on the Four Pillars initiative. This is well communicated across the Group 
and  allows  all  employees  to  actively  participate  on  improving  the  business  through  a  focus  on  revenue,  margins, 
simplification and communication. 

Revenue 
We  have  established  strong  business  controls  across  the  Group  to  ensure  we  fully  understand  the  financial  and 
operational implications for each piece of business that we engage in. This ensures that we do not pursue revenue for 
the sake of growth, but that we focus upon our IP and value propositions and the certainty of delivering lasting value to 
customers. We have improved the amount of recurring revenue in the business and this provides a strong foundation 
for future growth in both revenues and margins. 

Margins 
Having captured business, we have focussed on cost management, professional services productivity, delivery of value 
through the supply chain and standardised ways of working wherever possible. We believe we are well positioned to 
sustain and improve margins in the business moving forward as we gain share in our respective markets. I said that 
our focus during the year would be on cash generation and I am pleased to report a further reduction in our ongoing 
net debt position of £5.4m.  

Simplification 
We  have  also  focussed  on  simplifying  our  business  model.  During  the  course  of  the  year  we  have  driven  closer 
integration across previously diverse acquisitions. The supplier list has reduced by two-thirds from approximately 3,000 
at the end of FY18 to approximately 900 at the end of FY19. In addition, we have integrated our support operations 
and reduced the number of service desks from 6 to 2 providing a more coherent and consistent interaction with clients. 
Our intention is to consolidate this further and create a single service facility during FY20. 

In FY19 we have also reduced the number of supporting technologies and platforms in use across our Group. We have 
consolidated our activities on a single ERP system and although there is further work to do, we are now using systems 
and information across the business to much greater effect. 

During the year we disposed of our London property lease previously used in conjunction with the Digital business. 
After the year end we closed the Group’s remaining operations in Malta, following the disposal of the small emCare 
business having transferred healthcare activities fully to the UK, and exited the Group’s scanning activities based in 
the Republic of Ireland (ROI) that were originally acquired as part of the 6PM transaction. 

Communication 
Much  of  our  focus  this  year  has  been  on  re-engaging  with  staff,  listening  and  establishing  disciplines  across  the 
business that are practical, and that add value. Having set the goal to substantially improve our internal communications 
we now have an internal magazine, a news channel, CEO broadcasts, relevant and targeted divisional updates, town 
hall meetings, product videos, and our series of Regional Events, all rounded off by employee engagement surveys to 
see how we are doing against these goals. I believe these things have been important in reshaping our business and 
encouraging greater collaboration and open dialogue. I wish to express my gratitude to everyone that has been involved 
and engaged with this programme. 

9 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Strategic Report – Chief Executive’s Review (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Products 
The year has also seen us take significant steps forward with our product portfolio. Each product set now has a clear 
roadmap for future development, leading to a much clearer engagement with the existing and potential clients that we 
serve. We believe we have strong technology platforms supporting our core offerings and we have made it clear that 
as  we  move  forward,  a  SaaS  first  strategy  is  vital,  offering  our  clients  the  most  flexibility  possible  in  their  chosen 
solutions. We were delighted during the year to add Tascomi to our Local Government offering, providing clients with 
market leading SaaS capabilities. We plan to add further products to the Tascomi platform in due course. 

The disposal of the Digital business in November 2018 ensured that Idox focuses on niche solutions to the public sector 
and other regulated markets. In each of these areas we produce software that elegantly resolves complexity and which 
we invest in for the long term to support our customer’s evolving needs. Whilst the Digital operation was delivering 
bespoke solutions to unique client needs, our business is now solely focussed on delivering comprehensive repeatable 
software solutions that we support and maintain with long term contracts. 

Having taken a number of corrective measures, we are now well positioned to push the business forward and to deliver 
greater customer and shareholder value. 

Public Sector Software 
During the period, revenue reduced by 3% following the adoption of IFRS 15 and generally a more balanced approach 
to revenue growth. We have sought to improve or exit low-earning or loss-making revenue generating activities in the 
year which has led to an overall decrease in revenues recorded but higher margin and cash generation overall. We 
saw  new  Local  Government  client  wins  at  South  Staffordshire  and  Wakefield  for  the  EDMS  product  and  a  further 
extension  on  behalf  of  the  Northern  Ireland  Planning  Portal  for  our  Planning  Solution.  This  continues  the  existing 
relationship along with additional developments of the system. 

We  have  also  seen  a  number  of  customers  enter  into  new  long-term  contracts  for  existing  products,  for  example 
Winchester City Council signed a new 4-year contract for the Uniform product and a number of other distinct products. 
Midlothian  Council  also  extended  their  existing  agreement  a  further  5  years  moving  their  deployment  to  our  cloud-
based hosted environment. 

Leeds  City  Council  made  a  further  5  year  commitment  to  our  Uniform  solution,  Idox  will  also  be  performing  a  full 
operational review to help the Council ensure that they continue to maximise their use of technology both now and in 
the future. The London Port Authority also became a new customer for our licensing solution with a 3-year contract. 

During the year we have seen six new customers for our Social Care Education Health and Care Hub (EHC) enabling 
collaboration of EHC assessments, plans and reviews. The EHC Hub continues to be a vehicle for significant cultural 
change within Local Authorities providing live case tracking and 24/7 access to information for thousands of parents, 
carers and young people involved in statutory SEND (Special Education Needs and Disabilities) processes. Across our 
customers, the Hub is now being used to create, manage and review over 55,000 EHC Plans in England. We have 
also partnered with Westminster City Council to develop an innovative new Family Hub which enables multi-agency 
working with vulnerable families. 

Our  CAFM  (Computer  Aided  Facilities  Management)  product  has  enjoyed  a  successful  year  with  a  number  of  new 
deals including West Midlands Combined Authority and Serco Justice and Immigration. In all we won 10 new customers 
including Apex Hotels, Bank of China and Canford Healthcare. 

In Healthcare, we signed a deal with Virgin Care Services to provide our Lilie software in support of Cheshire West and 
Chester Council as well as Bolton NHS Foundation Trust. We also secured a long-term five-year extension for iFIT 
across 3 sites within the Betsi Cadwaladr Health Board, along with continued commitments from Gloucester, North 
Devon and Cumbria.  

In Transport we agreed contracts with Highways England to drive integration between Urban Traffic Management and 
Control systems. During the year we have focussed on concluding a number of significant projects and moving clients 
to live operation including WECA Bristol. 

Our Elections team supported over 100 authorities to deliver the Local Elections and European Parliamentary election 
in May. With less than 7 weeks' notice for delivering the poll, the Group supported customers covering over 12 million 
electors. Idox was contracted to print 3.8 million election documents and train 7,000 polling staff.  

10 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Strategic Report – Chief Executive’s Review (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Public Sector Software (continued) 
Idox also ran managed services across 17 sites to verify the statements and ballots of over 650,000 postal voters. In 
addition,  our  Elections  business  won  a  contract  from  the  Cabinet  Office  to  implement  phases  1  and  2  of  the 
Government's Canvass Reform programme, involving several hundred days of design, development, test, deployment 
and support, and will allow customers to improve their annual electoral canvass.   

We  also  deployed  the  electronic  ballot  counting  solution  on  the  island  of  Malta,  enabling  votes  to  be  counted 
electronically for the first time. Used in the European and local elections in late May, the solution cut the count duration 
from a previous record of several days down to a few hours, making Malta one of the first EU countries to issue their 
official European election results. 

Engineering Information Management (EIM) 
The Engineering division saw a revenue reduction of 8% as it continues to transition solutions and customers from an 
on-premise deployment model to a SaaS delivery which directly impacts the revenue profile of contract wins. In addition, 
we have sought to improve or exit low-earning or loss-making revenue generation activities in the year which has led 
to an overall decrease in revenues recorded but higher margin and cash generation overall.  

EIM continues to progress with its market leading, cloud-based FusionLive product which affords the Group greater 
EBITDA margins and revenue visibility. In the first half of the year we secured a 5-year contract for our new offering 
FusionLive with Wood PLC to manage its projects with Exxon Mobile. Other new clients to select FusionLive as their 
new cloud technology platform included the LNG (Liquid Natural Gas) owner operators NextDecade and GNL, and the 
engineering company IPS.  

A number of new projects in the AEC (Architecture, Engineering and Construction) and transport space in Europe were 
contracted  and  BNP  Paribas  renewed  its  commitment  to  our  solution  for  a  further  two  years  beyond  their  current 
contract term.   

We  released  a  new  engineering  tag  extraction  tool  to  support  the  digitalisation  initiatives  within  the  asset-intensive 
energy industries. This capability will be fully integrated into our cloud platform in FY20 to provide an additional and 
significant differentiator in the EPC (Engineering, Procurement and Construction) and Owner Operators markets.   

A  number  of  important  services  projects  on  our  Enterprise  platform  were  contracted  and  delivered,  including 
Sacramento Municipal Utility District, BC Hydro and Sonatrach.  

During  the  year  new  talent  was  brought  into  the  organisation  including  the  appointment  of  a  new  divisional  sales 
manager from within the industry and we have subsequently restructured the sales team, aimed at providing a greater 
focus on the UK and the USA in the coming year and in particular, the energy markets, where we believe that we can 
capitalise on the successful projects delivered during FY19. 

Content 
The Content division has continued to trade strongly with a 6% growth in revenue, capitalising on the strong domain 
knowledge we hold in our key target markets. 

Our Compliance business delivered an innovative game based GDPR compliance training solution for Statkraft along 
with a contract with Stada to communicate compliance training in eleven different languages. Other notable contracts 
in the year were secured with Sto Group, Chevron and Groupe ADP. 

There were further wins for our RESEARCHconnect and GRANTfinder products at Imperial College London, Swansea 
University, a consortium of South African Universities and Orbit Heart of England Housing & Care. The Wildlife Trusts 
signed a national contract for GRANTfinder in March. The University Grenoble Alpes committed to a 4-year contract 
for Open4Research and the Welsh Government renewed their Open4Business contract along with re-commitments 
from the London Borough of Islington, and Technische Universitat Munchen.  

London Fire Brigade and the  Greater  London Authority procured a new 4-year shared services agreement for data 
library and information services. 

The Grants team also had several notable successes including contracts with BITS, N2000 and LightSense SME II, 
Accenture and ICT Netherlands. 

11 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Strategic Report – Chief Executive’s Review (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Outlook  
We continue to explore ways to accelerate the Group's strategy and are confident that we have the right team and 
engagement throughout the organisation to deliver improved value for all our key stakeholders. A cloud-first approach 
across  each  of  our  business  areas  is  a  strategic  necessity  and  we  will  continue  to  invest  selectively  to  grow  our 
capabilities and support our customers. The business has a strong foundation in property and asset-based solutions 
and this, along with our focus on a broader SaaS provision, will underpin our future strategy and growth.  

David Meaden 
Chief Executive Officer 
9 April 2020 

12 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Strategic Report – Financial Review 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Financial Review 
The financial year ended 31 October 2019 has been a year of transition for the Group with a number of operational and 
finance processes being re-established. In particular the Group has adopted a strong focus on sales and commercial 
governance to ensure that only earnings-enhancing revenues are pursued. This approach has resulted in improving 
Adjusted EBITDA and improved cash generation from the operations of the Group compared to prior periods. 

Prior period adjustments have been recorded in respect of Revenue and Onerous Contracts following extensive and 
detailed product and contract reviews. Results in respect of FY18 presented have been restated to reflect these prior 
year adjustments. Further details are included in the Report of the Audit Committee and note 1 to the Group financial 
statements. 

The following table sets out the revenues and Adjusted EBITDA for each of the Group’s segments from its continuing 
activities: 

Restated 

FY18 

Variance 

£000 

£000 

% 

FY19 

£000 

Revenue 

- Public Sector Software 

    41,642  

42,539  

(897) 

- Engineering Information Management 

       9,170  

    10,003  

(833) 

- Content 

- Total 

Revenue 

- Public Sector Software 

- Engineering Information Management 

- Content 

Adjusted EBITDA* 

- Public Sector Software 

- Engineering Information Management 

- Content 

- Total 

Adjusted EBITDA margin 

- Public Sector Software 

- Engineering Information Management 

- Content 

- Total 

* See page 1 for definition of Adjusted EBITDA

-2% 

-8% 

6% 

-1% 

    14,680  

    13,872  

808 

    65,492  

66,414  

(922) 

64% 

14% 

22% 

64% 

15% 

21% 

    11,052  

    10,469  

583 

       1,410  

       1,361  

       1,899  

       1,809  

49 

90 

    14,361  

    13,639  

722 

6% 

4% 

5% 

5% 

27% 

15% 

13% 

22% 

25% 

14% 

13% 

21% 

13 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
  
  
 
 
 
  
  
  
  
 
  
  
 
  
  
 
  
  
 
  
  
 
 
Strategic Report – Financial Review (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Public Sector Software 
The PSS division, which now includes Health, due to shared common resources within PSS, accounted for 64% of 
Group revenues (2018: 64%), delivered revenues of £41.6m (2018: £42.5m). 

Public Sector Software Revenues 

- Recurring 

- Non-Recurring 

- Recurring* 

- Non-Recurring** 

Restated 

FY18 

Variance 

£000 

£000 

% 

FY19 

£000 

    24,144  

    19,239  

4,905 

    17,498  

    23,300  

(5,802) 

    41,642  

42,539 

(897) 

25% 

-25% 

-2% 

58% 

42% 

45% 

55% 

*  Recurring  revenue  is  defined  as  revenues  associated  with  access  to  a  specific ongoing  service,  with  invoicing  that  typically 
recurs  on  an  annual  basis  and  underpinned  by  either  a  multi-year  or  rolling  contract.  These  services  include  Support  & 
Maintenance, SaaS fees, Hosting services, and some Managed Service arrangements which involve a fixed fee irrespective of 
consumption.   

** Non-Recurring revenue is defined as revenues without any formal commitment form the customer to recur on an annual basis. 

Non-recurring product and services revenue decreased by 25% primarily as a result of the IFRS 15 adoption exercise 
in our Local Authority business which has resulted in less revenue being recognised as product, and more revenue 
allocated to  ongoing support and maintenance, and  hosting obligations,  commensurate with our  ongoing costs and 
obligations for those services. Recurring revenues conversely increased markedly year on year as a result.  

Adjusted EBITDA increased by 6% to £11.1m (2018: £10.5m), delivering a slightly improved EBITDA margin of 27% 
(2018: 25%). We continue with our efforts to consolidate individual business units and products within PSS to drive 
efficiency, and anticipate further margin improvement as we continue to leverage our common resources.  

Engineering Information Management 
The  EIM  division  accounted  for  14%  of  Group  revenues  (2018:  15%)  with  revenue  of  £9.2m  (2018:  £10.0m).  The 
business continued its transition from a traditional on-premise deployment to a SaaS solution. 

EIM saw a fall in revenue due to a continued emphasis on SaaS and managed service deals with the orders won being 
traded over future years. 

Engineering Information Management 

- Recurring 

- Non-Recurring 

- Recurring 

- Non-Recurring 

Restated 

FY18 

Variance 

£000 

£000 

% 

FY19 

£000 

7,100  

       7,285  

(185) 

-3% 

2,070  

       2,718  

(648) 

-24% 

9,170  

    10,003  

(833) 

-8% 

77% 

23% 

73% 

27% 

Adjusted  EBITDA  increased  by  4%  to  £1.4m  (2018:  £1.4m),  delivering  a  slightly  improved  EBITDA  margin  of  15% 
(2018: 14%). We continue to control costs tightly as the business transitions from its previous on-premise infrastructure 
to its present SaaS-led business model. 

14 

 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
  
  
  
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
  
  
  
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
   
 
   
  
 
   
 
  
 
 
  
  
 
 
Strategic Report – Financial Review (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Content 
The Content division in the UK and Europe had revenue growth of 6% to £14.7m (2018: £13.9m), driven in the main 
by continued success in our Dutch consultancy business, and German and Belgian compliance businesses. All other 
business in the division performed as expected. 

Content 

- Recurring 

- Non-Recurring 

- Recurring 

- Non-Recurring 

   Restated 

FY19 

£000 

FY18 

Variance 

£000 

£000 

% 

4,492  

4,059  

433 

11% 

    10,188  

9,813  

    14,680  

    13,872  

375 

808 

4% 

6% 

31% 

69% 

29% 

71% 

Adjusted EBITDA increased  slightly to £1.9m (2018: £1.8m), delivering  a consistent EBITDA margin of 13% (2018: 
13%). We continue to explore ways to improve EBITDA margin, both through targeting higher-margin revenue activities, 
and also actively managing cost. 

Loss Before Tax 
The following table provides a reconciliation between adjusted EBITDA and statutory loss before taxation. 

FY19 
£000 

Restated 
FY18 
£000 

Variance 

£000 

% 

Adjusted EBITDA 

14,361  

    13,639  

722 

5% 

Depreciation and Amortisation 

(9,128)  

    (9,319)  

191 

-2% 

Restructuring costs 

(2,155)  

       (436)  

(1,719) 

394% 

Acquisition (costs) / credits 

(174)  

          856  

(1,030) 

-120% 

Impairment 

Financing costs 

Share option costs 

Net finance costs 

-  

  (33,255)  

33,255 

-100% 

(368)  

       (336)  

(32) 

10% 

(859)  

         (50)  

(809) 

1,618% 

(1,702)  

    (1,339)  

(363) 

27% 

Loss before taxation 

(25)  

  (30,240)  

30,215 

-100% 

The reported loss before tax was £0.03m (2018: £30.2m loss). 

Restructuring costs were £2.2m (2018: £0.4m) as the new Management team assessed in detail all operations of the 
Group in the year; restructuring business units and Group processes to improve the Group’s current and future financial 
performance and prospects. 

15 

 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
  
   
   
  
   
  
  
  
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
  
  
  
  
 
 
  
   
  
   
  
   
  
   
  
   
  
   
  
   
  
  
  
  
 
 
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
Strategic Report – Financial Review (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Loss Before Tax (continued) 
Acquisition costs of £0.2m (2018: £0.9m credit) relates to the acquisition of Tascomi Limited. The prior year credit was 
in respect to an adjustment to deferred contingent consideration in relation to a prior period acquisition. 

There were no impairments in the year (2018: £33.3m). 

Net finance costs have increased to £1.7m (2018: £1.3m) as a direct consequence of the Group refinancing in February 
2019 at more expensive terms to the previous financing arrangements. This has since been superseded by improved 
commercial terms achieved for the Group’s new 3-year financing agreed in December 2019.  

The Group continues to invest in developing innovative technology solutions and has incurred capitalised development 
costs of £4.4m (2018: £3.6m).  

Taxation 
The effective tax rate (ETR) for the period was (190.07%) (2018: 8.39%).  

The main factors for the lower ETR on the net loss before tax position were threefold. New share options granted during 
the year, some of which were fully-vested on issue, resulted in a significant disallowable P&L impact. This was the 
same for costs incurred as part of the Digital division disposal and the acquisition of Tascomi.  

Lastly,  non-recognition  of  losses  in  certain  jurisdictions,  owing  to  uncertainty  over  their  future  utilisation,  decreased 
ETR significantly. The main jurisdiction impact was in France which, alongside non-recognition of current-year losses, 
elected to derecognise losses brought forward from prior years. This downward pressure on ETR was mitigated slightly 
by recognition of previously unrecognised losses in Malta, following taxable profits in some of the subsidiaries based 
there.    

Unrelieved trading losses of £0.4m, across the UK and the US, remain available to offset against future taxable trading 
profits with both likely to be extinguished during FY20. This number excludes substantial carried-forward losses not 
recognised for deferred tax purposes to date, owing to adoption of a prudent loss recognition position. The gross value 
of these losses not recognised to date totals £11.6m, split across Malta (£7.6m), the UK (£1.7m), Germany (£1.1m) 
and France (£1.2m). The Board is hopeful that the Group will benefit from these unrecognised tax losses in future and 
will be recognised at the point where utilisation becomes more certain. 

Earnings Per Share and Dividends 
Basic earnings per share for continuing and discontinued operations improved to (0.41)p (2018: (8.86)p) as a result of 
the impact of the impairment charge in FY18. Diluted earnings per share improved to (0.41)p (2018: (8.86)p). 

Adjusted  earnings  per  share  for  continuing  operations  fell  to  1.30p  (2018:  2.23p)  as  a  result  of  the  impact  of  the 
restructuring costs in year. Adjusted diluted earnings per share fell to 1.29p (2018: 2.21p).  

The Board proposes a final dividend of £Nil as the business transitions to a more stable platform, giving a total dividend 
for the year of £Nil. 

16 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Strategic Report – Financial Review (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Balance Sheet and Cash Flows 
The Group’s net assets have reduced to £44.6m compared to £47.9m at 31 October 2018. The constituent movements 
are detailed in the Group’s consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity: which are summarised as follows: 

12 months to 
31 October 2019 
(audited)  
£000 

Total Equity as per FY18 Financial Report 
FY19 Prior Year Adjustment 
Total Equity as per FY18 Financial Report Restated 
IFRS 15 adoption, net of deferred tax 
Transactions with owners (primarily issue of equity in respect of Tascomi acquisition) 
Loss for the year 
Non-controlling interest 
Exchange gains on translation of foreign operations 

Total Equity as per FY19 Financial Report 

49,786 
(1,918) 
47,868 
(9,588) 
8,330 
(1,706) 
(113) 
(180) 

44,611 

This movement is principally due to the IFRS 15 adoption, partially offset by the increase in intangible assets in the 
year of £7.2m due to the acquisition of Tascomi Limited, which was funded by the issue of the equity noted above.  

Cash generated from operating activities after tax as a percentage of Adjusted EBITDA was 86% (2018: 72%). Cash 
conversion has improved within the year as revenues (and therefore profit) are better linked to services and so more 
tightly aligned to payments the Group receives for work undertaken for our customers (in accordance with full adoption 
of the principles of IFRS 15).  

The Group ended the year with net debt of £26.4m (2018: £31.8m), a significant improvement on the previous year. 
Net  debt  comprised  cash  of  £7.0m  less  bank  borrowings  of  £21.8m  and  the  Malta  Stock  Exchange  listed  bond  of 
£11.6m. 

The Group’s total signed debt facilities at 31 October 2019 stood at £28.8m, a combination of a £5.75m term loan and 
£23m  revolving  credit  facility,  split  £5.75m  with  the  Royal  Bank  of  Scotland  and  £23m  with  Silicon  Valley  Bank 
respectively (the “Lenders”). Post year end, the Group has refinanced with The Royal Bank of Scotland plc, Silicon 
Valley Bank and Santander UK plc. The new facilities, which comprise a revolving credit facility of £35m and £10m 
accordion facility, are committed until December 2022, with an option to extend this commitment for a further two years. 

Contract liabilities, representing invoiced maintenance and SaaS contracts yet to be recognised in revenue stood at 
£20.3m  (2018:  £17.9m).  Contract  receivables,  representing  future  cash  flows,  decreased  to  £7.2m  (2018:  £18.4m). 
This reduction is a direct result of the adoption of IFRS 15 and more balanced revenue recognition assessment being 
made in the year. 

The Group has carefully assessed the likely impact of the Covid-19 pandemic on the business and our customers. Idox 
is fundamentally resilient due to the Group's high recurring revenue base, its focus on public sector markets and the 
high proportion of staff that routinely work from home. The Group retains significant liquidity with cash and available 
committed bank facilities and has strong headroom against financial covenants. We continue to monitor the situation 
and adapt our approach as required. 

17 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Strategic Report – Financial Review (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

IFRS 15 
The Group adopted IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers with effect from 1 November 2018 using the 
cumulative effect method. The two most significant impacts of implementing the standard are: 

  Software license revenue previously recognised once a customer commitment was confirmed are now instead 

recognised over the duration of the project implementation period as milestones are achieved. 

  Where  software  revenues  are  unbundled  to  individually  recognise  individual  performance  obligations  (notably 
initial license fees versus ongoing support and maintenance, and hosting obligations) this unbundling is performed 
against  pre-determined  criteria  to  ensure  that  revenues  recognised  in  the  future  for  ongoing  obligations  are 
commensurate with the ongoing costs of those obligations.  

The new standard more closely aligns our revenue recognition with the commercial substance of our contracts. The 
application of IFRS 15 has no impact on the lifetime profitability or cash flows of our contracts, or on the majority of our 
transactional businesses. Instead, the resulting changes in the timing of revenue and cost recognition more closely 
aligns our financial results with the timing of the delivery of our sales and services to our clients.  

Under the cumulative effect method the impact of the change to IFRS 15 has been recorded as an adjustment to the 
opening  contract  receivables,  contract  liabilities  and  retained  earnings  position.  The  comparative  statement  of 
comprehensive income figures have therefore not been restated. 

Further detail regarding the adoption of IFRS 15 is included within note 1, Accounting Policies, and note 2, Segmental 
Analysis. 

Rob Grubb 
Chief Financial Officer 
9 April 2020

18 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Strategic report – Principal Risks and Uncertainties 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Responsibility for Risk 
Risk identification and management strategy continues to be a key role for the Board, which has overall responsibility 
for the Group’s risk management. In addition, risk is specifically considered by the Audit Committee as part of the Audit 
Cycle.  The  Audit  Committee  has  responsibility  for  assessing  and  challenging  the  robustness  of  the  internal  control 
environment and remains committed to continuous improvements in controls, processes and reporting to build on the 
strong  progress  in  the  year  to  ensure  the  Group  remains  best  placed  to  suitably  mitigate  risks  that  emerge  as  the 
Group’s operations evolve.  

Risk management processes and internal control procedures are established across all levels of the Group and are 
managed by the Executive Directors in conjunction with dedicated expert professionals in the business.   

Risk management and internal controls provide reasonable but not absolute protection against risk. Risk appetite is not 
static and is regularly assessed by the Board to ensure it continues to be aligned with the Group’s goals and strategy.  

Embedding the Risk Culture  
Throughout the Group, risk management is subject to regular review and any opportunities for improvements identified 
are implemented. This is recognised by ongoing training and advice by divisional and business unit risk representatives, 
best practice sharing, gap analysis and internal benchmarking. Successful training and communication help build a 
culture and ability to further embed processes and procedures throughout the organisation. A more deeply embedded 
risk management culture supports long-term value creation for all stakeholders. 

Principal Risks and Uncertainties 
The  principal  risks  involved  in  delivering  the  Group’s  strategy  are  actively  managed  and  monitored  against  our  risk 
appetite. 

Risk 

Principal risks 

Management of risks 

Covid-19 
pandemic 

As  with  most  commercial 
organisations, 
the  Group’s 
activities are dependent on its 
ability to interact directly with 
its customers, suppliers, staff 
and  other  partners.  The 
emerging  impact  of  the  virus 
presents a risk to the Group’s 
ability to operate in the most 
effective manner. 

Idox 

continues 
impact  of 

to 
The  Group 
the 
monitor 
the 
Covid-19  pandemic. 
is 
well  placed  because  of  the 
Group's high recurring revenue 
base, its focus on public sector 
markets 
high 
proportion of staff that routinely 
work from home. 

and 

the 

The  Group  has  introduced  a 
number  of  cost  controls  over 
new and existing spend which, 
together  with  linked  Cost  of 
Sale  reductions,  will  mitigate 
reduction 
any  potential 
in 
the  Covid-19 
revenue 
from 
pandemic. 
Management 
continue  to  anticipate  future 
earnings and cash will be in line 
with its previous expectations.  

We  have  performed  detailed 
financial 
forecasting  of  a 
number  of  credible  potential 
Covid-19  pandemic  scenarios, 
as well as severe stress-testing 
in  our  financial  modelling.  The 
Group 
significant 
liquidity with cash and available 
committed bank facilities 

retains 

Change  in  assessment  of  risk 
in the period 

The exposures identified to date 
are as follows: 

policy 

is  exposed 

to 
notably 

  Our  Public  Sector  Software 
to 
business 
in 
government 
Covid-19 
response 
pandemic, 
the 
recent  postponement  of  the 
local  and  mayoral  elections 
originally scheduled for May 
2020 to May 2021 which will 
impact  the  Elections  sub-
segment  of  this  business. 
However,  the  overall  PSS 
business  has  strong  levels 
of recurring revenues from a 
well-established 
existing 
customer base and growing 
markets. 

its 

  Our EIM business has seen 
significant reduction in travel 
given 
cross-border 
operations  but  we  continue 
to  provide  the  majority  of 
and 
solutions 
service 
customers 
remotely.  Our 
EIM  business  also  has 
high 
existing 
strong 
recurring 
revenues  which 
account for approximately  

19 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Strategic report – Principal Risks and Uncertainties (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Risk 

Principal risks 

Management of risks 

Covid-19 
pandemic 
(continued) 

and  has  strong  headroom 
against  financial  covenants  in 
these potential scenarios. 

Political 

large 
The  Group  has  a 
customer 
Local 
in 
base 
Government  and  other  public 
sector  bodies.  A  change  in 
the 
spending  priorities  by 
current or a future Government 
could  materially 
the 
Group. 

impact 

Our favoured revenue model is 
for  high 
levels  of  recurring 
revenue  to  establish  a  stable 
base  of  contracted  or  highly 
visible revenues to react to any 
such  changes 
in  a  more 
strategic timeframe. 

of 

Our  development  priorities  are 
to  ensure  we  remain  at  the 
customer’s 
heart 
our 
cost 
operations,  delivering 
efficiencies  and  value 
for 
money,  including  moving  to 
cloud-based technologies.   

Change 
risk in the period 

in  assessment  of 

80% of its revenue targets, 
and is well-placed given its 
increasing focus on cloud-
based solutions. 

  Our Content business has 
in  Germany 
operations 
and 
Netherlands, 
however, the impact of the 
to-
Covid-19  pandemic 
date  has  been  minimal. 
We  are  not  anticipating 
any  impact  on  the  UK 
element  of  our  Content 
is  all 
business  which 
recurring  in  nature  and  in 
respect  of  public  sector 
customers. 

We continue to update our risk 
assessments  and  contingency 
the 
planning 
in  respect  of 
Covid-19  pandemic  as 
the 
impact of the virus develops. 

After  many 
years  of  a 
Conservative-led  Government 
espousing  austerity,  the  UK 
has 
seen 
recently 
from  all  main 
commitments 
political  parties  supporting  an 
end to austerity and increased 
public spending. 

the 

recent 

strong 
With 
Conservative  majority,  and 
many  of  these  commitments 
included in their manifesto, we 
are  buoyed  by  the  anticipated 
for  our 
implications 
funding 
public  sector  customers  whom 
we continue to support in both 
doing  more  with  what  they 
already have, but also investing 
for  the  future  to  drive  longer-
financial  benefits  and 
term 
improved 
customer 
experience. 

20 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Strategic report – Principal Risks and Uncertainties (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Risk 

Principal risks 

Management of risks 

Economic 
environment 

Our performance is affected by 
the  economic  cycles  of  the 
markets  of  the  countries  in 
which we operate. 

The ‘Brexit’ referendum on the 
exit  of  the  UK  from  the  Treaty 
of  the  European  Union  has 
increased the uncertainty in the 
and 
economic, 
environmental  markets 
in 
which we operate. 

social 

geographic 
A 
diversified 
footprint  and  sector 
focus 
reduces  the  risk  of  exposure 
due 
to  adverse  country  or 
sector specific conditions. 

We  have  scaled  back  our 
operations  in  ROI  and  Malta, 
our 
which 
structure, 
organisational 
reducing 
those 
territories. 

simplifies 

risk 

in 

We  remain  cognisant  of  UK 
and  EU  geo-political  events 
and consider any impact on our 
chosen markets, both to reduce 
risk but also to capitalise on any 
opportunities that arise. 

UK, 

with 

In  the  main  we  operate  within 
the 
discrete 
businesses  in  Germany  and 
the  Netherlands  which  serve 
largely  domestic  customers. 
The  Board  considers  that  it  is 
protected  from  cross  border 
Brexit  risks,  as  businesses 
largely  serve  the  needs  of  the 
they  are 
country 
located. 

in  which 

Acquisitions 

Acquisitions  and  restructuring 
the 
may 
not 
the 
anticipated 
Group. 

achieve 

returns 

for 

acquired 

reporting 

entities 
enhanced 

Focus  is  placed  on  ensuring 
management 
lines 
are clear, operational functions 
are 
of 
supported, 
or 
consolidated in to wider Group 
functions  as  appropriate,  and 
the  potential  for  upsell  and 
cross-sell  across  the  Group’s 
portfolio 
is 
maximised.  

products 

of 

Change 
risk in the period 

in  assessment  of 

Our  strategy  has  been  to  exit 
non-core  operations  and 
to 
closely 
integrate  our  core 
operations. This has led to the 
closure  of  our  Malta  and  ROI 
operations  as  we  integrated 
healthcare delivery in the UK  

clients  and 

We  continue  to  have  discrete 
operations in Germany and the 
largely 
Netherlands  serving 
domestic 
so, 
following  the  Malta  and  ROI 
exit, we have little exposure to 
the impact of Brexit beyond any 
general 
macro-economic 
impact that is common to all UK 
companies. 

We have upgraded our skill set 
in  this  area  with  recent  senior 
hires  and  have  established 
processes 
effective 
for 
acquisition  integration  across 
the Group.  

we 

consider 

are 
We 
significantly  better  placed  to 
integrate  and  make  a  success 
of  acquisitions  than  in  prior 
periods. 

We  have  project  plans  and 
track  restructuring  projects  to 
their  business  case  to  ensure 
that  actions  match  anticipated 
returns. 

21 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Strategic report – Principal Risks and Uncertainties (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Risk 

Principal risks 

Management of risks 

Technological 
development 

The  Group 
risks  being 
outclassed  by  competitor 
products that have increased 
capabilities  if  the  Group  fails 
to  deliver  continued  product 
development, 
including 
digital innovations.  

We  strive  to  invest  in  quality 
assurance  and  research  and 
development  to  deliver  quality 
products 
into  our  chosen 
markets.  

significantly 

recent  years  we  have 
In 
invested 
in 
increasing our capability in the 
delivery  of  digital  and  cloud-
based solutions.  

Ability to sell 
effectively 

The  Group 
deep 
experience  of  selling  our 
broad portfolio of products.  

has 

is 

It 
imperative  we  have 
effective sales and marketing 
models,  methodologies  and 
techniques 
effectively 
to 
realise  our  investments  in 
to 
software  products  and 
recover 
of 
the 
and 
associated 
support  functions,  and  that 
this is done in a profitable and 
cash generative way.  

delivery 

costs 

teams 

in 
These 

The  Group  has  developed 
strong  controls  to  support  its 
selling 
sales 
include 
effectively. 
upfront 
approval 
business 
controls to ensure we are only 
bidding  for  work  that  has  a 
suitable  opportunity 
for  a 
profitable,  cash  reward,  and 
review controls to ensure once 
we  are  committed  with  a 
customer, the agreed terms are 
achieved. 

Change  in  assessment  of  risk 
in the period 

In  FY19,  our  acquisition  of 
Tascomi’s  product  portfolio  of 
cloud-native  solutions  includes 
innovative solutions for Planning, 
Building  Control,  Land  Charges, 
Environmental  Health,  Trading 
Standards  and  Licensing.  This 
creates a strong platform for our 
core product sets. 

In  our  wider  Group,  we  have 
performed  product  assessments 
to consider status of our products 
and further work required against 
market 
and 
revenue 
opportunities, 
adjusted 
development plans accordingly.   

and 

As  a  result,  we  consider  the 
Group  to  have  lower  risk  from 
Technological development than 
in previous periods. 

The  Group  has  significantly 
improved  the  control  framework 
in our selling environment, which 
has led to a direct impact on both 
the margins and cash we are now 
realising  from  the  revenue  we 
commit to. 

In addition, we have a strong link 
between market opportunity and 
our  ability  to  exploit  both  with 
product  either  ready  or  on  our 
development  roadmap,  and  the 
strength 
sales 
of 
infrastructure to realise this.  

our 

than 

effectively 

As  a  result,  we  consider  the 
Group  to  have  lower  risk  from 
selling 
in 
previous  periods,  however  we 
consider  selling  to  be  a  “whole-
the 
team”  activity 
responsibility of every member of 
the  Group  and  so  continue  to 
strive for further improvements. 

that 

is 

22 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Strategic report – Principal Risks and Uncertainties (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Risk 

Principal risks 

Management of risks 

Change  in  assessment  of  risk 
in the period 

Capital 
structure 

Cyber risk 

The  Group  has  significant 
borrowings  in  the  form  of 
bank  debt  and  a  listed  Bond 
following 
period 
acquisitions.  

prior 

It  is  key  that  our  capital 
structure 
is  appropriately 
managed  to  ensure  we  can 
meet  all  obligations  as  they 
fall  due,  to  ensure  we  have 
sufficient 
to 
execute  our  strategy,  and 
ultimately 
to  deliver  cash 
returns for our investors. 

headroom 

We  operate  systems 
that 
maintain our confidential data 
and in some cases that of our 
customers.  

information 

An 
security 
breach  or  cyber-attack  could 
result in loss or theft of data, 
intellectual 
content 
property. 

or 

Signed on behalf of the Board by: 

David Meaden  
Chief Executive Officer 
9 April 2020

We perform regular reviews of 
short,  medium  and  long-term 
cash forecasting to ensure our 
anticipated  levels  of  cash  are 
sufficient  to  meet  both  near-
term  requirements  and  longer-
term strategic objectives.  

We  carefully  manage  cash 
receipts  and  payments  with 
customers  and  suppliers 
to 
ensure cash is delivered in line 
with agreed obligations. 

are 

relationships  with  our 
Our 
lenders 
significantly 
improved  on  prior  periods  as  a 
on 
result 
of 
better 
commitments  made, 
control 
and 
environment 
improving  financial  health  of  the 
Group,  including  in  particular, 
cash generation. 

delivering 

We have cyber, data protection 
and  security  policies  in  place 
the 
and 
effectiveness of these policies.  

regularly 

review 

There  is  an  enterprise-wide 
data  security  programme  and 
defined  incident  management 
processes,  including  those  for 
employees  to  report  security 
breaches. 

The Group is accredited to the 
UK  Government  based  Cyber 
and 
Essentials 
operates 
27001 
accredited Information Security 
Management System. 

standard 
ISO 

an 

Whilst  we  are  satisfied  with  our 
actions  in  the  period  to  mitigate 
cyber  risk,  we  remain  cognisant 
that,  it  is  by  nature  a  constantly 
developing risk and we continue 
to  review  our  processes  and 
approaches on an ongoing basis. 

23 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Board of Directors 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Chris Stone Non-Executive Chairman 

Chris was appointed Non-Executive Chairman on 22 November 2018. Chris is the Chairman of NCC Group plc and 
was Chairman of CityFibre plc until its sale. He has held various non-executive director and chief executive roles of 
listed and private equity backed technology companies, including being CEO of Northgate Information Solutions plc, 
from 1999 to 2011 where he led the transformation of the business from a small domestic player to a global leader. 
From 2013 to 2016, Chris was CEO of Radius Worldwide, a provider of software and services to support high growth 
companies establish and manage international operations. 

David Meaden Chief Executive Officer 

David Meaden was appointed Chief Executive on 1 June 2018. Prior to joining Idox, David held the position of Chief 
Executive  at  Northgate  Public  Services,  a  FTSE  250  company,  and  led  the  business  through  its  successful  sale  to 
Cinven in 2014. David has a degree in Business Studies from the University of Huddersfield.  

Rob Grubb Chief Financial Officer 

Rob Grubb was appointed Chief Financial Officer on 1 November 2018. Prior to joining Idox, Rob held the position of 
CFO at Gresham Technologies plc from 2009 to March 2018 where he also served as Company Secretary until 2013. 
Prior to this he held roles at Lucite International and Ernst & Young in the UK and New Zealand specialising in financial 
services and technology. Rob is a member of the Institute of Chartered Accountants of Scotland. 

Jeremy Millard Non-Executive Director 

Jeremy Millard provides corporate finance advice to companies in the Technology sector as well as sitting on the board 
of a number of private and listed companies. He previously spent five years at Rothschild, based in their London office, 
advising  clients  on  all  aspects  of  corporate  finance,  including  on  a  number  of  major  cross-border  transactions 
encompassing Europe, North America and the Middle East. Between 2001 and 2007, Jeremy worked at Hawkpoint 
Partners, where he had a strong focus on advising mid-market UK listed companies. Jeremy was appointed as a non-
executive director of Ilika plc on 1 October 2018 and of Omega Diagnostics Group plc on 1 March 2019 (he chairs the 
audit committee of both AIM-listed companies). He qualified as a Chartered Accountant in 1999 and holds an M. Eng 
from Cambridge University. He is the Chairman of the Audit Committee.  

Oliver Scott Non-Executive Director 

Oliver is a partner of Kestrel Partners LLP, which he co-founded in 2009. Prior to this, Oliver spent 20 years advising 
smaller quoted and unquoted companies, latterly as a director of KBC Peel Hunt Corporate Finance. He previously 
was  a  non-executive  director  of  IQGeo  Group  plc  and  KBC  Advanced  Technologies  plc  prior  to  its  takeover  by 
Yokogawa in 2016. 

Phil Kelly Non-Executive Director 

Phil has served as a non-executive director of several listed and private companies in the software and related services 
sector,  and  is  currently  a  non-executive  director  of  Castleton  Technology  plc.  Prior  to  that  he  had  over  25  years’ 
experience as the Chief Executive of private and publicly quoted software companies supplying the commercial and 
public sectors in the UK, Europe and the USA. Phil had previously worked for Digital Equipment Corporation and 3i 
Consultants. 

He has an Economics degree from the University of Leicester and a Master’s Degree in Business Administration from 
Cranfield University.

24 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

The Directors submit their report and audited financial statements for the year ended 31 October 2019. 

Results and Dividends 
The Group’s audited financial statements for the year ended 31 October 2019 are set out on pages 54 to 101. The 
Group’s loss for the year after tax amounted to £1.8m (2018: £36.6m loss). The Directors have not paid a dividend in 
FY19. The Directors do not propose any dividend to be paid in respect of the year ended 31 October 2019.  

Post Balance Sheet Events 
Refinancing 
It was announced on 19 December 2019 that the Group had refinanced with the Royal Bank of Scotland plc, Silicon 
Valley Bank and Santander UK plc. The new facilities, which comprise a revolving credit facility of £35,000,000 and 
£10,000,000 accordion facility, are committed until December 2022, with an option to extend this commitment for a 
further two years.  

Disposal of SIX-PM Health Solutions (Ireland) Limited 
The  Group  agreed  on  22  November  2019  to  sell  its  shareholding  in  SIX-PM  Health  Solutions  (Ireland)  Limited,  a 
medical-record  scanning  business  based  in  Limerick,  to  its  Managing  Director  for  €1.  During  the  year  ended  31 
October 2019 SIX-PM Health Solutions (Ireland) Limited recorded revenues of €392,000 (2018: €587,000) and loss 
before tax on a standalone basis of €378,000 (2018: €12,000 loss). 

Disposal of emCare Business 
On 31 December 2019, the Group sold the trade and assets of its emCare business to Go plc, a telecoms business 
based  in  Malta,  for  cash  consideration  of  €100,000.  During  the  year  ended  31  October  2019  emCare  business 
recorded  revenues  of  €317,000  (2018:  €338,000)  and  profit  before  tax  of  €128,000  (2018:  €115,000).  Despite  the 
profitability recorded in the business in FY18 & FY19, the business was anticipated to become loss-making for the 
foreseeable future. 

UK Corporation Tax 
On the 11 March 2020, the UK Government announced its intention to scrap its planned reduction of UK corporation 
tax from its current rate of 19% to a reduced rate of 17%, starting 1 April 2020. The Group’s UK deferred tax assets 
and  liabilities  at  31  October  2019  are  measured  at  17%,  being  the  rate  previously  announced  and  enacted  at  the 
balance  sheet  date.  The  impact  on  our  deferred  tax  balances  had  they  been  recognised  at  the  revised  rate  is  as 
follows: 

Deferred tax assets 
Deferred tax liabilities 

Current 
at 17% 
£000 

Revised 
to 19% 
£000 

1,368 
(4,015) 
(2,647) 

1,529 
(4,487) 
(2,958) 

Covid-19 pandemic 
The Group continues to monitor the impact of the Covid-19 pandemic. Idox is well placed because of the Group's high 
recurring revenue base, its focus on public sector markets and the high proportion of staff that routinely work from 
home.  

Further  details  of  our  assessment  of  the  impact  of  the  Covid-19  pandemic  on  the  Group  is  included  in  the  Going 
Concern disclosures in the Directors’ Report on pages 28 and 29. 

Future Developments 
Further information in relation to future developments has been disclosed in the Strategic Report as permitted by The 
Companies Act 2006, S414c(11). 

25 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Directors and Their Interests 
The Directors who served during the year and their beneficial interests (including those of their immediate families) in 
the Company’s 1p ordinary share capital were as follows: 

C Stone (appointed 22 November 2018) 
D Meaden 
R Grubb (appointed 1 November 2018) 
O Scott*** (appointed 1 November 2018) 
P Kelly (appointed 29 March 2019) 
J Millard 
L Vaughan* (resigned 19 November 2018) 
R Kellett-Clarke** (resigned 3 April 2019) 
B Moorhouse (resigned 29 March 2019) 

      Number of shares 

31 October 2019 

1 November 2018 

936,377 
468,139 
80,265 
33,537,916 
105,263 
- 
not applicable 
not applicable 
not applicable 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
232,250 
15,098,668 
- 

* 2018: 232,250 of these shares are held through a Self-Invested Pension Plan. 

**  2018:  2,761,667  of  these  shares  are  held  through  Self-Invested  Pension  Plans,  11,400,001  shares  are  held  through  certain 
members of his family and a family trust and 937,000 are held directly and subject to a two-year lock-in period following LTIP exercise 
in Mar 2018. 

*** 33,537,916 of these share are held through Kestrel Opportunities, which Oliver Scott is deemed to have a beneficial interest in.  

In addition to the shareholdings listed above, certain Directors have been granted options over ordinary shares. Full 
details of these options are given in the Report on Remuneration on pages 30 to 31. 

Details of the Directors’ service contracts can be found in the Report on Remuneration on pages 30 to 31. 

Insurance for Directors and Officers 
The Company has granted an indemnity to one or more of its Directors against liability in respect of proceedings brought 
by third parties, subject to the conditions set out in section 234 of the Companies Act 2006. Such qualifying third party 
indemnity provision remains in force as at the date of approving the Directors’ Report. Directors’ and officers’ liability 
insurance with an indemnity limit of £10m has been purchased in order to minimise the potential impact of proceedings 
against Directors in respect of claims that fall within the policy cover provided.  

Substantial Shareholdings 
As at 31 October 2019, the Company was aware of the following interests in 3% or more of its issued share capital: 

Shareholder 

Number of shares 

% Holding 

Canaccord Genuity Wealth Management 
Soros Fund Management 
Kestrel Investment Partners 
Herald Investment Management 
Long Path Partners 
Richard Griffiths 
Lombard Odier Asset Management 
Gresham House 

72,948,354 
55,246,663 
44,654,438 
30,909,483 
29,210,879 
29,175,642 
21,018,471 
17,433,409 

16.46 
12.47 
10.08 
6.98 
6.59 
6.58 
4.74 
3.93 

Transaction in own shares 
During the year, the Group did not purchase any of its own ordinary shares.  

During the year no share option exercises were satisfied using treasury shares.  

The maximum number of shares held in treasury at any time during the year was 1,491,219, which had a cost value of 
£620,182. The current number of shares held in treasury is 1,491,219.  

26 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Health, Safety and Environmental Policies 
The Group recognises and accepts its responsibilities for health, safety and the environment (H,S&E) and has a team 
which  provides  advice  and  support  in  this  area.  The  team  members  regularly  attend  external  H,S&E  courses  and 
internal reviews are performed on a regular basis to ensure compliance with best practice and all relevant legislation.   

Anti-slavery and Human Trafficking  
Pursuant to Section 54 of the Modern Slavery Act 2015, the Group has published a Slavery and Human Trafficking 
Statement for the year ended 31 October 2019. The Statement sets out the steps that the Group has taken to address 
the risk of slavery and human trafficking occurring within its own operations and its supply chains. This statement can 
be found on the Group’s corporate website: https://www.idoxgroup.com/investors/articles-policies/. 

Disabled Employees 
Applications for employment by disabled persons are always fully considered, bearing in mind the aptitudes and abilities 
of the applicant concerned.   

In  the  event  of  members  of  staff  becoming  disabled,  every  effort  is  made  to  ensure  that  their  employment  with  the 
Group  continues  and  that  appropriate  training  is  arranged.  It  is  the  policy  of  the  Group  that  the  training,  career 
development and promotion of disabled employees should, as far as possible, be identical with that of other employees.   

Employee Consultation 
The  Group  consults  employees  on  appropriate  matters  via  The  Group’s  Staff  Consultation  Forum  comprising  staff 
representatives elected to reflect The Group’s business activities. An  employee consultation  policy is also  in  place. 
Employees are encouraged to present their views and suggestions in respect of the Group’s performance and policies. 
In addition, the Group has an intranet, which facilitates faster and more effective communication. 

An Employee Share Investment Trust is in place to provide UK-based employees with a tax efficient way of investing 
in the Company. The Company purchases matching shares, which become the property of the employee after a three 
year vesting period. 

Financial Risk Management Objectives and Policies 
The Group uses various financial instruments which include cash, equity investments, bank loans and items such as 
trade debtors and trade creditors that arise directly from its operations. The main purpose of these financial instruments 
is to provide finance for the Group’s operations.  

The main risks arising from the Group’s financial instruments are credit risk, liquidity risk, exchange rate risk, price risk 
and interest rate risk. The Directors review these risks on an ongoing basis. This policy has remained unchanged from 
previous years. Further information on financial risk management is disclosed in note 23 of the Group accounts. 

Credit Risk 
The Group’s principal financial assets are cash and trade receivables. The credit risk associated with cash is limited as 
the counterparties have high credit ratings assigned by  international credit-rating  agencies. The principal credit risk 
arises therefore, from its trade receivables.  

In order to manage credit risk, the management review the debt ageing on an ongoing basis, together with the collection 
history and third-party credit references where appropriate.  

Liquidity Risk 
The Group seeks to manage financial risk by ensuring sufficient liquidity is available to meet foreseeable needs through 
cash management and availability of borrowing facilities and by investing cash assets safely and profitably.  

Exchange Rate Risk 
The Group monitors its exposure to exchange rate risk on an ongoing basis. The Group has limited exposure to foreign 
exchange risk as a result of natural hedges arising between sales and cost transactions. 

Cash Flow and Interest Rate Risk 
The Group’s bank borrowings bear interest at rates linked to LIBOR. On an ongoing basis, the Board reviews the LIBOR 
rate and discuss whether it is considered necessary to set up hedges to protect against interest rate movements.  

27 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Going Concern 
The Directors, having made suitable enquiries and analysis of the accounts, consider that the Group has adequate 
resources to continue in business for the foreseeable future. In making this assessment, the Directors have considered 
the Group’s budget, cash flow forecasts, available banking facility with appropriate headroom in facilities and financial 
covenants and levels of recurring revenue. 

It was announced on 19 December 2019 that the Group had refinanced with the Royal Bank of Scotland plc, Silicon 
Valley Bank and Santander UK plc. The new facilities, which comprise a revolving credit facility of £35,000,000, are 
committed until December 2022, with an option to extend this commitment for a further two years. The new facility is 
on improved commercial terms with a lower margin grid and standard financial covenants in respect of leverage and 
cash flow cover. 

As the Group has net current liabilities of £26.3m as at 31 October 2019, the Directors have specifically considered 
whether this represents an indication of an issue with the going concern basis for the Group’s accounting, particularly 
as the corresponding balance as at 31 October 2018 was a net current asset position of £6.1m. The Directors have 
identified that: 

 

 

the FY19 closing position includes our £21.8m borrowings which are secured for up to five years, being disclosed 
in less than one year due to the timing of finalising our new banking arrangement post year end, whereas the 
borrowings  in  FY18  were  in  the  main  disclosed  as  greater  than  12  months  due  to  that  refinancing  being  an 
extension of additional facilities, and therefore excluded from current liabilities; and 

in FY19 the Group has seen a large opening accounting, non-cash, adjustment in FY19 that has reduced contract 
receivables and increased contract liabilities by a total of £12.6m following the adoption of IFRS 15.  

After adjusting for these items to present an appropriate year on year comparison, the Group’s net current asset position 
has improved by £2m from FY18 to FY19. Therefore, the Directors do not consider the net current liabilities reported 
as at 31 October 2019 to be an indicator of any issue with the Group’s going concern assessment. 

Covid-19 pandemic impact on Going Concern assessment 
Idox along with most companies has been impacted by the emerging Covid-19 pandemic. We continue to assess the 
impact of the Covid-19 pandemic on the business, taking actions to mitigate or limit the impacts on our organisation 
where we can and supporting our staff, customers and partners in dealing with the emerging situation. 

As  part  of  the  preparation  of  our  FY19  results,  the  Group  has  carefully  assessed  the  likely  impact  of  the  Covid-19 
pandemic  on  our  business  and  specifically  considered  if  it  creates  any  material  uncertainty  in  our  going  concern 
assessment. We have considered in detail anticipated changes in the way we engage with our customers, staff, supply 
chains and banking partners as a result of the Covid-19 pandemic. 

Idox is fundamentally resilient to the Covid-19 pandemic due to the Group's high recurring revenue base, its focus on 
public sector markets and the high proportion of staff that routinely work from home. The Group retains significant 
liquidity with cash and available committed bank facilities and has strong headroom against financial covenants. We 
continue to monitor the situation as it continues to evolve and adapt our approach as required.  

The exposures identified to date are as follows: 

  Our Public Sector Software business is exposed to government policy in response to the Covid-19 pandemic, 
notably the recent postponement of the local and mayoral elections originally scheduled  for May 2020 to May 
2021 which will impact the Elections sub-segment of this business. However, the overall PSS business has strong 
levels of recurring revenues from a well-established existing customer base and growing markets. 

  Our EIM business has seen significant reduction in travel given its cross-border operations which has had a limited 
impact but we continue to provide the majority of solutions and service customers remotely. Our EIM business 
also has strong existing high recurring revenues which account for approximately 80% of its revenue targets, and 
is well-placed given its increasing focus on cloud-based solutions. 

  Our  Content  business  has  operations  in  Germany  and  Netherlands,  however,  the  impact  of  the  Covid-19 
pandemic impact to-date has been minimal. We are not anticipating any impact on the UK element of our Content 
business which is all recurring in nature and in respect of public sector customers.  

The Group has introduced a number of cost controls over new and existing spend which, together with linked Cost of 
Sale reductions, will mitigate any potential reduction in revenue from the Covid-19 pandemic. Management continue 
to anticipate future earnings and cash will be in line with its previous expectations.  

28 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

We have performed detailed financial forecasting of a number of credible potential Covid-19 pandemic scenarios, as 
well as severe stress-testing in our financial modelling which includes potential restructuring in order to preserve the 
Group as a going concern in the event of the most extreme possible impact on our Group of the Covid-19 pandemic. 
The key assumptions in these scenarios are: 

 

There will be a direct impact period until most of the current restrictions are lifted as well as a recovery period 
until commercial and social life has broadly returned to normal (recovery period). 

  Revenues from existing support and recurring services contracts will not be materially impacted. 

  Revenues from new business and from current projects will be impacted by delays and some cancellation of 

procurements in the current pipeline. 

  Cost management actions will be taken, consistent with these assumptions and the impacts experienced. 

The scenarios considered most credible for the markets in which we operate and the customer base we have are: 

A.  A direct impact period of 3 months and a recovery period of 3 months. This scenario assumes 20% to 50% of 
procurements are delayed but the majority resume. Project work recovers and any backlog is cleared by the 
end of the recovery period. 

B.  A direct impact period of 6 months and a recovery period of 9 months. This scenario assumes 30% to 70% of 
procurements are delayed into the recovery period and a number are cancelled. Project work recovers and 
any backlog is cleared by the end of the longer recovery period. 

We are satisfied these are valid and reasonable assumptions and that the scenarios tested are the most appropriate 
and credible as the Group has high levels of recurring revenue and repeating revenues from a diverse customer base 
across a number of business units. Both scenario A (our anticipated impact based on current information) and scenario 
B (further sensitivity test) demonstrate the business is expected to have significant liquidity available from cash in hand 
and  from  committed  facilities  and  has  strong  headroom  against  financial  covenants.  In  both  scenario  A  and  B,  the 
Group is forecasting liquidity in excess of £20m and headroom of at least 100% on financial covenants. Therefore, this 
supports the going concern assessment for the business. 

In our severe stress testing financial modelling we have sought to identify an extreme set of circumstances that would 
result in the Group breaching banking covenants and extinguishing its available liquidity. In order to create such a set 
of circumstances we further adjusted scenario B to reduce all Group revenues by 50% for the period April 2020 to June 
2021, but with no further action on cost.  

Whilst it is informative to identify extreme circumstances to test the Group’s liquidity, this scenario is considered highly 
unlikely due to the high levels of recurring revenues the Group has in respect of software that is often either central to 
the customer, or a specific regulatory requirement under statute. Furthermore, in the event the Group did find revenues 
deteriorated further beyond the scenario’s modelled, the Group has identified mitigating actions to preserve its liquidity. 
These  actions  include  reducing  any  operations  that  may  have  become  severely  loss-making  due  to  the  Covid-19 
pandemic either through further reduction in operational spend, restructuring of business units, or utilising available 
government financial support with job retention schemes. 

Auditor 
A resolution to reappoint an Auditor and to authorise the Directors to agree their remuneration will be placed before the 
forthcoming Annual General Meeting of the Company. 

Statement of Disclosure to Auditor 
So far as each person who was a Director at the date of approving these financial statements is aware, there is no 
relevant  audit  information  of  which  the  Group’s  auditor  is  unaware.  Additionally,  each  Director  has  taken  all  the 
necessary steps, that they ought to have taken as a Director in order to make themselves aware of all relevant audit 
information and to establish that the Group’s auditor is aware of this information. 

This report was approved by the Board of Directors and authorised for issue. Signed on its behalf by: 

Ruth Paterson 
Company Secretary 
9 April 2020 

29 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
 
 
 
Corporate Governance Report 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

In December 2018 the Board separated the activities of the Nomination and Remuneration Committee. This followed 
changes in Board membership and a review of the Company’s governance arrangements. New Terms of Reference 
were agreed for both committees and are available at https://www.idoxgroup.com/investors/corporate-governance/.  

The  Nomination  Committee  was  formed  in  December  2018  with  Oliver  Scott  as  Chair, and  all  other  Non-Executive 
Directors as members.  

The Remuneration Committee was formed in November 2018 with Barbara Moorhouse as Chair and all other Non-
Executive Directors as members. Barbara Moorhouse stepped down as Chair following her resignation as a Director 
effective 29 March 2019. Phil Kelly was appointed as Chair of the Remuneration Committee on his appointment as a 
Director on 29 March 2019.  

The Company’s remuneration policies and the application of these policies to the Board and Senior Management Team 
during the year are set out in the sections below. 

Remuneration Policy 
The policy of the Group is to set levels of remuneration to attract, retain and motivate Executive Directors and other 
key senior staff. The packages are designed to be competitive in value to those offered to the Directors of similar sized 
public companies in related sectors. It is the Board's policy to align the long-term interests of managers with those of 
our shareholders in the granting of options and other equity awards.  

The  components  of  the  Executive  Directors’  remuneration  packages  are  currently  a  basic  salary,  bonus,  money 
purchase pension contributions and benefits in kind. The benefits include car allowance, private medical cover and life 
cover. The bonus elements are dependent on the Executive Directors achieving performance criteria set out by the 
Remuneration Committee. In addition, the Group operates a Long-term Incentive Plan for the Executive Directors.   

Directors’ Remuneration  

2019 

Executive Directors 
David Meaden 
Rob Grubb (appointed 1 November 2018) 

Non-Executive Directors 
Chris Stone* (appointed 22 November 2018) 
Oliver Scott (appointed 1 November 2018) 
Phil Kelly (appointed 29 March 2019) 
Jeremy Millard 
Laurence Vaughan* (resigned 19 November 2018) 
Richard Kellett-Clarke (resigned 3 April 2019) 
Barbara Moorhouse (resigned 29 March 2019) 

* Chairman 

Basic 
salary 
and fees 
2019 
£000 

331 
175 

94 
42 
21 
56 
31 
23 
15 
788 

Bonus 
 2019 
£000 

160 
72 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
232 

Benefits 
in kind 
2019 
£000 

Total 
 2019 
£000 

Pension 
2019 
£000 

20 
9 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
29 

511 
256 

94 
42 
21 
56 
31 
23 
15 
1,049 

- 
10 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
10 

30 

 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Corporate Governance Report (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Directors’ Remuneration (continued) 

2018 

Executive Directors 
Andrew Riley (resigned 1 March 2018) 
Richard Kellett-Clarke  
(13 December 2017 - 1 June 2018) 
Jane Mackie (resigned 30 August 2018) 
David Meaden (appointed 1 June 2018) 

Non-Executive Directors 
Laurence Vaughan* (resigned 19 November 2018) 
Richard Kellett-Clarke (1 November - 13 December 
2018 and 1 June 2018 onwards) 
Peter Lilley (resigned 19 April 2018) 
Jeremy Millard  
Barbara Moorhouse  

* Chairman 

Basic 
salary 
and fees 
2018 
£000 

Bonus 
 2018 
£000 

Benefits 
in kind 
2018 
£000 

Total 
 2018 
£000 

Pension 
2018 
£000 

199 

165 
146 
140 

105 

19 
16 
35 
35 
860 

- 

- 
- 
83 

- 

- 
- 
- 
- 
83 

3 

1 
8 
8 

- 

- 
- 
- 
- 
20 

202 

166 
154 
231 

105 

19 
16 
35 
35 
963 

2 

- 
10 
- 

- 

- 
- 
1 
- 
13 

The amounts in respect of pension represent money purchase pension contributions. 

Non-Executive Directors 
The Board reviews the remuneration of the Chairman and Non-Executive Directors on a regular basis.  

Service Contracts 
The Executive Directors have entered into service contracts with the Group that are terminable by either party on no 
less than six months prior notice.  

Share Options  
The Directors believe it is important to incentivise key management and employees.   

The following options have been granted to the Directors over ordinary 1p shares in the Company: 

Director 

Richard 
Kellett-Clarke 
Chris Stone 
David Meaden 
Rob Grubb 
Totals 

At start 
of year 

800,000 
- 
- 
- 

585,500 
3,512,400 
1,000,000 

800,000 

5,097,900 

Granted 

Exercised 

Lapsed 

At end of 
year 

Exercise 
price 

Exercise 
date from 

Exercise 
date to 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 

(800,000) 
- 
- 
- 

- 
585,500 
3,512,400 
1,000,000 

(800,000) 

5,097,900 

38.38p 
1p 
0p 
0p 

Feb 2015 
Mar 2019 
Mar 2020 
Mar 2020 

Feb 2025 
Mar 2029 
Mar 2029 
Mar 2029 

The mid-market price of the Company’s shares at close of business on 31 October 2019 was 34.35p and the low and 
high share prices during the year were 27.00p and 38.90p, respectively. 

The Company recognised total expenses of £859,381 (2018: £50,000) related to equity-settled, share-based payment 
transactions during the year. Of the total recognised, expenses of £859,381 (2018: £50,000) related to equity-settled, 
share-based payment transactions during the year, of which £683,731 (2018: £44,000) related to the LTIP share option 
scheme. 

The pre-tax aggregate gain on exercise of share options during the year was £Nil (2018: £628,623). Note 26 of the 
Group accounts contains full disclosure of the Company’s share options. 

31 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Corporate Governance Report (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Directors’ Share Interests 
The Directors’ shareholdings in the Company are listed in the Directors’ Report on page 26. 

Corporate Governance 
Idox  plc  has  adopted  the  QCA  Corporate  Governance  Code  (the  “Code”)  on  a  comply  or  explain  basis.  Further 
the  Compliance  Statement  published  on  our  website: 
Information  on 
https://www.idoxgroup.com/media/2232/idox-plc-statement-of-compliance-with-the-corporate-governance-code.pdf. 
Where Idox chooses not to comply with the Code it will explain such choices in the context of the business. 

that  can  be 

found  within 

Board of Directors 
Subject to the Articles of Association, UK legislation and any directions given by special resolution, the business of the 
Group is managed by the Board. The Code requires the Group to have an effective Board whose role is to develop 
strategy  and  provide  leadership  to  the  Group  as  a  whole.  It  sets  out  a  framework  of  controls  that  allows  for  the 
identification, assessment and management of risk. Additionally, it ensures the Board takes collective responsibility for 
the success of the Group. 

The Board’s main roles are to provide leadership to the management of the Group, determine the Group’s strategy and 
ensure that the agreed strategy is implemented. The Board takes responsibility for approving potential acquisitions and 
disposals, major capital expenditure items, disposals, annual budgets, annual reports, interim statements and Group 
financing matters.  

The  Board  appoints  its  members  and  those  of  its  principal  Committees,  following  the  recommendations  of  the 
Nomination Committee. The Board reviews the financial performance and operation of the Group’s businesses. The 
Board regularly reviews the identification, evaluation and management of the principal risks faced by the Group, and 
the effectiveness of the Group’s systems of internal control. 

The Board considers the appropriateness of its accounting policies on an annual basis. The Board believes that its 
accounting policies, in particular in relation to income recognition and research and development, are appropriate and 
are advised by its Auditors on future changes to such accounting policies.  

Financial results with comparisons to budget and forecast results are reported to the Board on a regular basis, together 
with a commercial report on operational issues. Significant variances from budget or strategy are discussed at Board 
meetings and actions set in place to address them. 

Board and committee meetings are scheduled in line with the financial calendar of the Group. The timing of meetings 
ensures the latest operating data is available for review and that appropriate time and focus can be given to matters 
under consideration. The Board met ten times throughout the year for principal Board meetings to discuss a formal 
schedule of business. The Board is supported by an Executive team, and is supported by qualified Executive, senior 
and finance management teams. 

Role of Chairman and Chief Executive Officer 
The Code requires that there should be a clear division of responsibilities between the running of the Board and the 
Executive responsible for the Group’s business, so as to ensure that no one person has unrestricted powers of decision. 

The Chairman is responsible for the leadership of the Board, ensuring its effectiveness and setting its agenda. Once 
strategic  and  financial  objectives  have  been  agreed  by  the  Board,  it  is  the  CEO’s  responsibility  to  ensure  they  are 
delivered upon.  

To facilitate this, the CEO regularly meets the Executive Management Team which additionally comprises business 
division directors and senior members of the management team. The day to day operations of the Group are managed 
by the EMT. 

Composition of and Appointments to the Board  
The Code requires that there should be a balance of Executive and Non-Executive Directors and when appointing new 
Directors to the Board, there should be a formal, rigorous and transparent procedure.   

The  Board  comprises  the  Non-Executive  Chairman,  the  CEO,  the  CFO  and  three  Non-Executive  Directors.  Short 
biographies of the Directors are given on page 24. 

32 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
Corporate Governance Report (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

The  Board  considers  Chris  Stone,  Jeremy  Millard  and  Phil  Kelly  as  independent.  Oliver  Scott  is  not  considered 
independent as he represents Kestrel LLP, a major shareholder. 

The Board is satisfied with the balance between Executive and Non-Executive Directors and will continue to review this 
position  in  the  coming  years.  The  Board  considers  that  its  composition  is  appropriate  in  view  of  the  size  and 
requirements  of  the  Group’s  business  and  the  need  to  maintain  a  practical  balance  between  Executive  and  Non-
Executive Directors. 

Each member of the Board brings different skills and experience to the Board and the Board Committees. The Board 
is satisfied that there is sufficient diversity in the Board structure to bring a balance of skills, experience, independence 
and knowledge to the Group. 

The  Code  requires  that  the  Board  undertakes  a  formal  annual  evaluation  of  its  own  performance  and  that  of  its 
Committees and Directors. Following the changes to the Board in November 2018, the Non-Executive Chairman has 
been  working  with  each  Non-Executive  Director  to  assess  their  individual  contribution  and  to  assess  that  their 
contribution is relevant and effective, they have sufficient time to commit to the role, and where relevant, they have 
maintained their independence. Given the level of changes in the recent period, the Chairman shall schedule a formal 
review of the performance of the individual Directors, and their functioning as a team to ensure that the members of 
the board collectively function in an efficient and productive manner in FY20.  

The Board continues to annually review its composition, to ensure there is adequate diversity to allow for its proper 
functioning and that the Board works effectively together as a unit.  

When a new appointment to the Board is made, consideration is given to the particular skills, knowledge and experience 
that a potential new member could add to the existing Board composition. The Nomination Committee may elect to 
engage external recruitment agencies, with appropriate consideration being given, in regard to Executive appointments 
to internal and external candidates. Before undertaking the appointment of a Non-Executive Director, the Chairman 
establishes that the prospective Director can give the time and commitment necessary to fulfil their duties, in terms of 
availability both to prepare for and attend meetings and to discuss matters at other times. 

Board Committees 
The  Audit  Committee  has  been  established  to  look  after  specific  areas  of  the  Board’s  responsibilities.  The  Audit 
Committee is chaired by Jeremy Millard and at present includes Chris Stone, Oliver Scott and Phil Kelly. The Report of 
the Audit Committee can be found on pages 38 to 42. 

In  December  2018  the  Board  established  two  separate  Committees  to  replace  the  previous  Nomination  and 
Remuneration Committee, chaired by Peter Lilley until April 2018. 

The Remuneration Committee was chaired by Barbara Moorhouse until her resignation as Director effective 29 March 
2019,  and  was  chaired  by  Phil  Kelly  from  the  date  of  his  appointment  as  a  Director,  also  on  29  March  2019.  The 
committee members include Chris Stone, Oliver Scott and Jeremy Millard. 

The Committee has overall responsibility for making recommendations to the Board, of the remuneration packages of 
the Executive Directors. The Committee’s key responsibilities include: 

  making recommendations to the Board on any changes to service contracts; 

 

 

 

approving and overseeing any share related incentive schemes within the Group; 

ensuring that remuneration is in line with current industry practice; and 

ensuring remuneration is both appropriate to the level of responsibility and adequate to attract and / or retain 
Directors and staff of the calibre required by the Group. 

The  Nomination  Committee  is  chaired  by  Oliver  Scott  and  includes  Chris  Stone,  Jeremy  Millard  and  Phil  Kelly  as 
members. 

33 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Corporate Governance Report (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

The Committee has overall responsibility for making recommendations to the Board, of the composition of the Board. 
The Committee’s key responsibilities include: 

 

 

 

 

reviewing the size, composition and structure required of the Board and making recommendations to the Board 
with regard to any changes;  

identifying and nominating, for approval by the Board, candidates to fill Board vacancies as they arise;  

giving full consideration to succession planning for Directors; and 

vetting  and  approving  recommendations  from  the  Executive  Directors  for  the  appointment  of  senior 
Executives.  

The  Audit  Committee  met  four  times  in  the  year,  the  Remuneration  Committee  met  four  times  in  the  year,  and  the 
Nominations Committee met two times in the year.  

Re-election 
Under the Code, Directors should offer themselves for re-election at regular intervals. Additionally, under the Group’s 
Articles of Association, at least one third of the Directors who are subject to retirement by rotation are required to retire 
and may be proposed for re-election at each Annual General Meeting. New Directors, who were not appointed at the 
previous Annual General Meeting, automatically retire at their first Annual General Meeting and if eligible, can seek re-
appointment. 

There are no Directors due to retire by rotation and seek re-election at the next Annual General Meeting. 

The new Director appointed since the last AGM, Phil Kelly, will automatically retire at the Annual General Meeting and 
will seek re-appointment. 

Internal Control 
The Board takes responsibility for establishing and maintaining reliable systems of control in all areas of operation. 
These  systems  of  control,  especially  of  financial  control,  can  only  provide  reasonable  but  not  absolute  assurance 
against  material  misstatement  or  loss.  The  Board  remains  committed  to  a  continuous  programme  to  make 
improvements in controls, processes and reporting to build on the strong progress in the year to ensure the Group 
remains best placed to suitably mitigate risks that emerge as the Group’s operations evolve. 

Prior period adjustments have been recorded in respect of Revenue and Onerous Contracts following extensive and 
detailed product and contract reviews by both Management and the Group’s auditors. 

The Audit Committee has maintained a close dialogue with Management and the Group’s external auditors in FY19 
and the resulting audit process to ensure the extensive operational reviews performed by the new Management team 
have been thorough and the resulting accounting has been appropriate. In addition, we have worked closely with the 
new Management team as part of their efforts to upgrade processes and controls throughout the Group, and where 
appropriate have requested recommendations for future improvements for addressing identified issues. 

The key matters relating to the system of internal control are set out below: 

 

 

 

 

 

Idox has established an operational management structure with clearly defined responsibilities and regular 
performance reviews; 

the Group operates a comprehensive system for reporting financial and non-financial information to the Board, 
including review of strategy plans and annual budgets; 

on a monthly basis, financial results are monitored in detail against budgets, forecasts and other performance 
indicators with action dictated accordingly at each meeting; 

a  structured  approval  process  is  maintained  for  sales  order-to-cash  and  procurement  purchase-to-pay 
processes based on assessment of risk and value delivered; and 

sufficient resource is focused to maintain and develop internal control procedures and information systems, 
especially in financial management. 

34 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Corporate Governance Report (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

The Board considers that there have been improvements in internal financial controls that have reduced the risk of 
material losses, contingencies or uncertainties that need to be disclosed in the accounts particularly in respect to sales 
governance. These  improvements  have  included  the  introduction  of  a  Business  Approval  Form,  whereby  all  new 
business  must  be  approved  based  on  size  and  risk  before  presentation  to  the  customer,  introduction  of  formal  bid 
reviews  for  material  contracts,  introduction  of  balance  sheet  and  cash  flow  forecasting,  and  introduction  of  detailed 
monthly business reviews. 

The Board remains committed to further improvements in the internal control environment of the Group and is currently 
working with senior operational and finance staff to; 

 

 

 

 

 

further  develop  the  Group’s  suite  of  financial  reporting  through  investments  in  its  Customer  Relationship 
Management and Enterprise Resource Planning systems and internal resourcing to improve granularity and 
robustness of routine reporting; 

incorporate the outputs from the detailed monthly business reviews in Board reporting, detailing operational 
issues as they arise and any impact on the Group’s financial reporting;  

establish  a  programme  for  senior  operational  management  to  attend  Board  meetings  and  present  on  their 
subject matter and answer questions; 

embed risk management throughout the organisation, by establishing risk registers at a divisional level, to be 
consolidated and presented to the Board; and 

consider the need for internal audit, notably to ensure the control frameworks established are being suitably 
adhered to. 

The Board confirms that there is an ongoing process for identifying, evaluating and managing the significant risks faced 
by the Group, and that this process has been in place for the year under review and up to the date of approval of the 
Annual Report and Accounts. This process is regularly reviewed by the Board.  

Information and Development 
The Code requires that the Board should be supplied in a timely manner with information in a form and of a quality 
appropriate to enable it to discharge its duties. 

The Chairman is responsible for ensuring that all the Directors continually update their skills, knowledge and familiarity 
with the Group in order to fulfil their role on the Board and the Board’s Committees. Updates dealing with changes in 
legislation and regulation relevant to the Group’s business are provided to the Board by external advisors, the CFO, 
the Company Secretary and in-house legal advisors. 

All Directors have access to the advice and services of the Company Secretary, who is responsible to the Board for 
ensuring its procedures are properly complied with and that the discussions and decisions are appropriately minuted. 
Directors may seek independent professional advice at the Group’s expense in furtherance of their duties as Directors. 

Training on matters relevant to their role is available to all Board Directors. New Directors are provided with an induction 
in order to introduce them to the operations and management of the business. 

Investor Relations 
Idox is committed to open communication with all its shareholders. The Directors hold regular meetings with institutional 
shareholders to discuss and review the Group’s activities and objectives. Communication with private shareholders is 
principally through the Annual General Meeting, where participation is encouraged and where the Board is available to 
answer  questions.  Idox  maintains  up-to-date  information  on  the  Investor  Relations  section  of  its  website 
www.idoxplc.com. 

The CEO and CFO meet institutional investors after publication of the annual and interim results, on an ongoing basis, 
as required.  

The Directors also undertake consultation on certain matters with major shareholders from time to time. Through these 
consultations, the Group maintains a regular dialogue with institutional shareholders. Feedback is reported to the Board 
so that all Directors develop an understanding of the views of major shareholders.  
Trading updates and press releases are issued as appropriate and the Group’s Nominated Advisor (NOMAD) provide 
briefings  on  shareholder  opinion  and  compile  independent  feedback  from  investor  meetings.  The  Annual  General 
Meeting is used by the Directors to communicate with both institutional and private investors.  

35 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Corporate Governance Report (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Every shareholder has access to a full annual report each year end and an interim report at the half year end. Care is 
taken to ensure that any price sensitive information is released to all shareholders, institutional and private, at the same 
time in accordance with London Stock Exchange requirements.  

Idox strives to give a full, timely and realistic assessment of its business in all price-sensitive reports.  

AIM Rule Compliance Report 
Idox is quoted on AIM, London Stock Exchange’s international market for smaller growing companies. Idox complies 
with the AIM Rules, in particular AIM Rule 31 which requires the following: 

 

 

 

 

 

sufficient procedures, resources and controls to enable its compliance with the AIM Rules; 

seek advice from NOMAD regarding its compliance with the Rules whenever appropriate and take that advice 
into account; 

provide  the  NOMAD  with  any  information  it  reasonably  requests  in  order  for  the  NOMAD  to  carry  out  its 
responsibilities under the AIM Rules for Nominated Advisers, including any proposed changes to the Board 
and provision of draft notifications in advance; 

ensure that each of the Directors accepts full responsibility, collectively and individually, for compliance with 
the AIM rules; and 

ensure that each Director discloses without delay all information which the Group needs in order to comply 
with AIM Rule 17 (Disclosure of Miscellaneous Information) insofar as that information is known to the Director 
or could with reasonable diligence be ascertained by the Director. 

36 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Directors Responsibilities Statement 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Directors’ Responsibilities Statement 
The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report and Accounts and the financial statements in accordance 
with applicable law and regulations. 

Company law requires the Directors to prepare financial statements for each financial year. Under that law, the Directors 
have to prepare the Group financial statements in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) 
as adopted by the European Union and Article 4 of the IAS Regulation and have elected to prepare the parent Company 
financial  statements  in  accordance  with  United  Kingdom  Generally  Accepted  Accounting  Practice  (United  Kingdom 
Accounting Standards and applicable law), including FRS 101 “Reduced Disclosure Framework”. 

Under Company law, the Directors must not approve the financial statements unless they are satisfied that they give a 
true and fair view of the state of affairs and profit or loss of the Group and Company for that period.  

In preparing the parent Company financial statements, the Directors are required to: 

select suitable accounting policies and then apply them consistently; 

 
  make judgements and accounting estimates that are reasonable and prudent; 
 

state whether applicable UK Accounting Standards have been followed, subject to any material departures 
disclosed and explained in the financial statements; and 
prepare  the  financial  statements  on  the  going  concern  basis  unless  it  is  inappropriate  to  presume  that  the 
Company will continue in business. 

 

In preparing the Group financial statements, International Accounting Standard 1 requires that Directors: 

 
 

 

properly select and apply accounting policies; 
present information, including accounting policies, in a manner that provides relevant, reliable, comparable 
and understandable information; 
provide  additional  disclosures  when  compliance  with  the  specific  requirements  in  IFRSs  are  insufficient  to 
enable users to understand the impact of particular transactions, other events and conditions on the entity's 
financial position and financial performance; and 

  make an assessment of the Company's ability to continue as a going concern. 

The  Directors  are  responsible  for  keeping  adequate  accounting  records  that  are  sufficient  to  show  and  explain  the 
Company’s transactions and disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of the Company and 
enable them to ensure that the financial statements comply with the Companies Act 2006. They are also responsible 
for safeguarding the assets of the Company and hence for taking reasonable steps for the prevention and detection of 
fraud and other irregularities. 

The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of the corporate and financial information included on 
the Company’s website. Legislation in the United Kingdom governing the preparation and dissemination of financial 
statements may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions. 

Responsibility Statement 
The Directors confirm that to the best of their knowledge:  

 

 

 

the financial statements, prepared in accordance with the relevant financial reporting framework, give a true 
and fair view of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit or loss of the Company and the undertakings 
included in the consolidation taken as a whole; 
the strategic report includes a fair review of the development and performance of the business and the position 
of  the  Company  and  the  undertakings  included  in  the  consolidation  taken  as  a  whole,  together  with  a 
description of the principal risks and uncertainties that they face; and 
the  annual  report  and  financial  statements,  taken  as  a  whole,  are  fair,  balanced  and  understandable  and 
provide  the  information  necessary  for  shareholders  to  assess  the  Company’s  position  and  performance, 
business model and strategy. 

This responsibility statement was approved by the Board of Directors on 9 April 2020 and is signed on its behalf by: 

David Meaden  
Chief Executive Officer 

Rob Grubb 
Chief Financial Officer 

37 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Report of the Audit Committee 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Overview 
This report details the activities of the Committee during the financial year ended 31 October 2019. The report sets out 
how the Committee has discharged its responsibilities in relation to internal control and risk management.  

Membership and Meetings 
The Audit Committee is a committee of the Board and is comprised of four Non-Executive Directors: Jeremy Millard, 
Chris Stone, Oliver Scott and Phil Kelly.  

The Audit Committee is chaired by Jeremy Millard. By virtue of his Executive and current Non-Executive responsibilities, 
the Board considers that Jeremy Millard has relevant and recent financial experience to discharge this role, as noted 
on page 24.  

The Audit Committee invites the Executive Directors, the Auditor and other senior managers to attend its meetings as 
appropriate. The Company Secretary is also the Secretary of the Audit Committee. 

The  Audit  Committee  is  considered  to  have  sufficient,  recent  and  relevant  financial  experience  to  discharge  its 
functions. The Committee carries out its duties for Idox plc, its major subsidiary undertakings and the Group as a whole, 
as appropriate.  

During the year under review, the Audit Committee held four scheduled meetings. The Group’s Auditor has a standing 
invitation  to  attend  meetings  and  representatives  were  in  attendance  at  all  of  the  four  scheduled  meetings.  The 
Executive  Directors  were  welcome  to  attend  the  meetings  and  were  in  attendance  at  all  meetings  of  the  Audit 
Committee in the year.  

Roles and Responsibilities 
The Audit Committee has a wide remit and its key functions include reviewing and advising the Board on: 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

the integrity of the financial statements of the Group, including its annual and interim reports, preliminary results 
announcements and any other formal announcement relating to its financial performance, reviewing significant 
financial reporting issues and judgements which they contain;  

the appointment and remuneration  of  the Auditor  and their effectiveness in line with the requirements of the 
Code; 

the  nature  and  extent  of  non-audit  services  provided  by  the  Auditor  to  ensure  that  their  independence  and 
objectivity are maintained; 

changes to accounting policies and procedures; 

decisions  of  judgement  affecting  financial  reporting,  compliance  with  accounting  standards  and  with  the 
Companies Act 2006; 

internal  control  and  risk  management  processes,  including  principal  risks  and  internal  control  findings 
highlighted by management or external audit;  

the content of the Auditor’s transparency report, concerning Auditor independence in providing both audit and 
non-audit services; 

the  scope,  performance  and  effectiveness  of  other  internal  control  functions  and  the  Auditor’s  assessment 
thereon; and 

the Group’s procedures for responding to any allegations made by whistle-blowers. 

The Audit Committee considers and reviews non-audit services provided by the Auditor, and this is tabled annually at 
Board for discussion.  

The  Audit  Committee  reports  to  the  Board  on  the  effectiveness  of  the  Auditor  and  receives  information  from  the 
Executive team in this regard. The Audit Committee and Board also consider the appointment of the Auditor annually 
prior to recommending the appointment of the Auditor at the Idox Annual General Meeting.  

38 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Report of the Audit Committee (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Audit Committee Activities in the Financial Year Ended 2019 
The  Committee  met  four  times  during  the  financial  year  ended  31  October  2019  to  consider  standing  items  on  its 
agenda and the prior period adjustments arising in the year. The Committee’s standing items on its agenda: 

  Received and considered, as part of the review of interim and annual financial statements, reports from the 
Auditor in respect of the audit plan for the year and the results of the annual audit. These reports included the 
scope  of  the  annual  audit,  the  approach  to  be  adopted  by  the  Auditor  to address  and  conclude  upon  key 
estimates  and  other  key  audit areas,  the basis  on  which  the  Auditor  assesses  materiality,  the  terms  of 
engagement for the Auditor and an on-going assessment of the impact of future accounting developments 
for the Group. 

  Considered the Annual Report and Accounts in the context of being fair, balanced and understandable. 

  Considered the effectiveness and independence of the external auditor. 

  Considered the risk register and principal risks to Group. 

  Considered the effectiveness of the Group’s risk management and internal control systems. 

  Considered the whistleblowing procedures. 

  Considered managements key judgement papers. 

  Considered the level and value of non-audit services. 

  Considered the review of business reporting segments in line with the guidance in respect of identifiable cash 

generating units. 

  Considered the key audit matters from the Extended Audit Report. 

  Considered  the  effectiveness  of  the  Group’s  risk  management  and  internal  control  systems,  including 
establishment of the improved controls described above, and ensuring the finance department is sufficiently 
resourced with qualified and experienced individuals. 

Prior Period Adjustments 
In line with the improved governance in the year the Audit Committee, Management and the Group’s auditors have 
worked  closely  to  identify  several  prior  period  adjustments  required  to  present  the  current  and  prior  periods 
appropriately in these financial statements. These items include: 

  Contract  irregularities  from  FY16  identified  from  our  detailed  product  and  project  reviews,  and  monthly 

 

business review controls. 
Identification of a loss-making contract by the Group’s auditors during the audit process that was subsequently 
identified  as  an  onerous  contract  that  should  have  been  recorded  in  prior  periods.  As  a  result,  the  Audit 
Committee commissioned a review of all material contracts in the Group, and commissioned a report by the 
Group’s  Chief Process and Transformation  Officer to identify how the onerous contract  had  not previously 
been identified. These reviews concluded there were no other such examples of onerous contracts within the 
Group  and  resulted  in  several  recommendations  to  strengthen  the  link  between  operational  controls  and 
financial reporting which the Audit Committee and Executive Management have fully adopted. 

  Contracts identified, during our detailed IFRS 15 adoption review, which had revenue overstatements in prior 
periods  whereby  revenue  was  recognised  by  previous  Management  teams  despite  not  being  permissible 
under IAS 18 Revenue, the applicable accounting standard at the time. 

More details of these items and their impact on the financial statements are included in Significant Matters below and 
presented in Note 1, Accounting Policies. 

Internal Audit 
During the year, the committee considered the need for a separate internal audit function and its impact on the external 
audit. The committee concluded that given the level of transformation and activity by Management, the Board and the 
Group’s  auditors  in  assessing  the  Group’s  control  environment,  establishment  of  a  separate  internal  audit  function 
would not have been effective in FY19, however, the requirement for an internal audit function will be kept under review 
by the committee as the Group and its control framework continue to evolve.  

39 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Report of the Audit Committee (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Effectiveness of the Auditor 
The Committee continues to monitor the work of the Auditor to ensure that the Auditors remain effective. This includes 
liaising directly on significant matters (such as the IFRS adoption in the year) and discussing with Executive Directors 
and senior finance staff on Auditor performance.   

The Committee is satisfied with the effectiveness of the Auditor in performing their audit for the year ended 31 October 
2019. 

Independence and Objectivity of the Auditor 
The Committee continues to monitor the work of the Auditor to ensure that the Auditor’s objectivity and independence 
is not compromised by it undertaking inappropriate non-audit work. The current auditor, Deloitte LLP, was appointed 
on 19 June 2018. 

Auditor objectivity was safeguarded by the Committee considering several factors:  

 

 

an appraisal of the standing and experience of the audit partner; and 

the  nature  and  level  of  services  provided  by  the  Auditor  and  confirmation  from  the  Auditor  that  they  have 
complied with relevant UK independence standards and fully considered any threats and safeguards in the 
performance of non-audit work. 

Non-audit Fees 
It is the Audit Committee’s policy to engage the Group’s Auditor for non-audit services where such level of expertise 
are not readily available from comparable firms at a commensurate cost, and engaging for such services would not 
impair the independence of the Group’s Auditor. The Committee considers each engagement for non-audit services 
carefully against this policy, and when satisfied approves all non-audit work commission from the external auditors. 
During the year the fees paid to the Auditor were £350,000 (2018: £275,000) for Group and subsidiary audit services, 
£Nil (2018: £67,000) for interim audit services, and £187,000 (2018: £224,000) for non-audit services relating to tax 
compliance and advice and refinancing advice. 

The  Committee  concluded  that  it  was  in  the  interests  of the Group  to  use  the  Auditor  for  this  work  as  they  were 
considered to be best placed to provide these services and didn’t present a threat to Deloitte’s independence. 

Significant Matters in Relation to Financial Statements 
Revenue Recognition 
Management  assesses  both  legal  paperwork  and  the  underlying  commercial  specifics  of  transactions,  alongside 
accounting standards, to determine revenue recognition treatment. This assessment could involve internal chartered 
accountants, internal legal staff, operational staff and professional advice where appropriate. 

The Audit Committee has supervised the work of Management closely during the year as the Group’s new revenue 
recognition framework has developed aligned to IFRS 15 and implemented throughout the business. In addition, the 
Audit Committee have regularly liaised with the Group’s Auditors to validate that judgements made by Management in 
respect of revenue recognition are appropriate for the Group and consistent with external expectation.   

As part of this exercise, several examples of revenue overstatements in prior periods have been identified whereby 
revenue was recognised by previous Management teams despite not being permissible under IAS 18 Revenue, the 
applicable accounting standard at the time. 

Management has concluded whilst these overstatements in respect of prior periods individually are not significant, they 
are of sufficient quantum cumulatively to be represented as a prior year adjustment in these financial statements. See 
note 1 for further details of the Restatement of comparative figures. 

40 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Report of the Audit Committee (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Goodwill and Intangible Valuation 
The Group recognises intangible assets acquired as part of business combinations. These include, Goodwill, Customer 
relationships, Trade names, Software, Development costs, Database and Order backlog, which are recorded at fair 
value at the date of acquisition. The determination of these fair values is based upon management's judgement, and 
includes assumptions on the timing and amount of future incremental cash flows generated by the assets and selection 
of an appropriate cost of capital. Management estimates the expected useful lives of intangible assets and charges 
amortisation on those assets accordingly.   

Management  is  required  to  test,  at  least  annually,  whether  goodwill  has  suffered  any  impairment.  The  recoverable 
amount is determined based upon value-in-use and net realisable value calculations. The value-in-use method requires 
the calculation of future cash flows and the choice of a suitable discount rate in order to calculate the present value of 
these  cash  flows.  Pre-tax  discount  rates  have  been  applied  and  are  based  on  WACC  calculations  performed  and 
supplied by independent valuation specialists.  

The Audit Committee has considered Management’s assessments of value-in-use of cash generating units of intangible 
assets  at  the  reporting  date.  This  included  specifically  considering  and  subsequently  approving  business  plans 
prepared by Management, supporting the future performance expectations used in the calculation of the value-in-use. 
Impairment reviews were also an area of focus for the external auditor, which reported its findings to us. 

Onerous Contract 
In relation to the loss-making contract that was identified, by the Group’s auditors, that should have been recorded in 
prior periods, the Audit Committee commissioned a review of all material contracts in the Group and commissioned a 
report by the Group’s Chief Process and Transformation Officer to identify how the onerous contract had not previously 
been identified. These reviews concluded there were no other such examples of onerous contracts within the Group 
and resulted in several recommendations to strengthen the link between operational controls and financial reporting 
which the Audit Committee and Executive Management have fully adopted. 

Management has concluded the onerous contract identified in respect of prior periods is of sufficient quantum to be 
represented as a prior year adjustment in these financial statements. See note 1 for further details of the Restatement 
of comparative figures. 

Prior Period Adjustments 
As set out above, prior period adjustments have been recorded in respect of Revenue and Onerous Contracts following 
extensive and detailed product and contract reviews by both Management and the Group’s auditors.  

The Audit Committee has maintained a close dialogue with Management and the Group’s external auditors in FY19 
and the resulting audit process to ensure the extensive operational reviews performed by the new Management team 
have been thorough and the resulting accounting has been appropriate. In addition, we have worked closely with the 
new Management team as part of their efforts to upgrade processes and controls throughout the Group, and where 
appropriate have requested recommendations for future improvements for addressing identified issues. 

We have specifically challenged Management’s presentation of historical issues as prior period adjustments and are 
satisfied these are cumulatively material and should be accounted for as prior period adjustments in order to present 
the FY19 results in a fair and meaningful manner.   

Covid-19 Pandemic Impact 
The Audit Committee, along with the remainder of the Board, has reviewed the Covid-19 pandemic impact assessment 
undertaken by management and, in particular, the assumptions made and the scenarios chosen for the assessment.  

The key assumptions are: 

 

There will be a direct impact period until most of the current restrictions are lifted as well as a recovery period 
until commercial and social life has broadly returned to normal (recovery period). 

  Revenues from existing support and recurring services contracts will not be materially impacted. 

  Revenues from new business and from current projects will be impacted by delays and some cancellation of 

procurements in the current pipeline. 

  Cost management actions will be taken, consistent with these assumptions and the impacts experienced. 

41 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Report of the Audit Committee (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

The scenarios considered most credible for the markets in which we operate and the customer base we have are: 

A.  A direct impact period of 3 months and a recovery period of 3 months. A number of procurements are delayed 
but the majority resume. Project work recovers and any backlog is cleared by the end of the recovery period. 

B.  A direct impact period of 6 months and a recovery period of 9 months. A number of procurements are delayed 
into the recovery period and a number are cancelled. Project work recovers and any backlog is cleared by the 
end of the longer recovery period. 

We are satisfied these are valid and reasonable assumptions and that the scenarios tested are the most appropriate 
and credible. Both scenario A (our anticipated impact based on current information) and scenario B (further sensitivity 
test) demonstrate the business is expected to have significant liquidity available from cash in hand and from committed 
facilities and has strong headroom against financial covenants, and therefore, support the going concern assessment 
for the business. 

Impact of IFRS 15: Revenue from Contracts with Customers 
During the year the Audit Committee has focused on the impact of the new accounting standard IFRS 15: Revenue 
from Contracts with Customers. 

The Group adopted IFRS 15 on 1 November 2018 and applied the standard on a cumulative effect basis. During the 
year ended 31 October 2018 and in the first half of the year ended  31 October 2019, the Group has  undertaken a 
review of all the services and products the Group provides, and the main types of commercial arrangements used with 
each service and product. Both the UK and the overseas businesses have been impacted by IFRS 15 and the two most 
significant impacts of implementing the standard are: 

  Software license revenue previously recognised once a customer commitment was confirmed are now instead 

recognised over the duration of the project implementation period as milestones are achieved. 

  Where software revenues are unbundled to individually recognise individual performance obligations (notably 
initial  license  fees  versus  ongoing  support  and  maintenance,  and  hosting  obligations)  this  unbundling  is 
performed  against  pre-determined  criteria  to  ensure  that  revenues  recognised  in  the  future  for  ongoing 
obligations are commensurate with the ongoing costs of those obligations.  

Further details on the changes to the accounting policy and the impact of the adoption of IFRS 15 are included in the 
Notes to the Accounts. 

Other Matters 
The Committee is authorised to seek any information it requires from any Group employee in order to perform its duties. 
The Committee can obtain, at the Group’s expense, outside legal or other professional advice on any matters within its 
terms of reference. 

The Committee may call any member of staff to be questioned at a meeting of the Committee as and when required. 

Reporting Responsibilities 
The Committee makes whatever recommendations to the Board it deems appropriate on any area within its remit where 
action or improvement is required.  

The Committee ensures that it gives due consideration to laws and regulations, the provisions of the QCA Corporate 
Governance  Code,  the  requirements  of  the  UK  Listing  Authority's  Listing  Rules,  Prospectus  and  Disclosure  and 
Transparency Rules, the AIM Rules for Companies and any other applicable rules as appropriate. The Committee also 
oversees any investigation of activities which are within its terms of reference.  

The Audit Committee operates within agreed terms of reference; these can be found on the Group’s website. 

Jeremy Millard 
Chairman of the Audit Committee 
9 April 2020 

42 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Independent Auditor's Report to the Members of Idox plc  

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Report on the audit of the financial statements 

1.  Opinion 

In our opinion: 
 

the financial statements of Idox plc (the parent Company) and its subsidiaries (the Group) give a true and fair 
view of the state of the Group’s and of the parent Company’s affairs as at 31 October 2019 and of the Group’s 
loss for the year then ended; 
the Group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting 
Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the European Union; 
the parent Company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom 
Generally Accepted Accounting Practice, including Financial Reporting Standard 101 “Reduced Disclosure 
Framework”; and 
the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006. 

 

 

 

We have audited the financial statements which comprise: 

 
 
 
 
 

the consolidated statement of comprehensive income; 
the consolidated and parent Company balance sheets; 
the consolidated and parent Company statements of changes in equity; 
the consolidated cash flow statement; and 
the related notes 1 to 31 to the Group financial statements, and the related notes 1 to 15 to the parent 
Company financial statements. 

The  financial  reporting  framework  that  has  been  applied  in  the  preparation  of  the  group  financial  statements  is 
applicable law and IFRSs as adopted by the European Union. The financial reporting framework that has been applied 
in  the  preparation  of  the  parent  Company  financial  statements  is  applicable  law  and  United  Kingdom  Accounting 
Standards,  including  FRS  101  “Reduced  Disclosure  Framework”  (United  Kingdom  Generally  Accepted  Accounting 
Practice). 

2.  Basis for opinion 
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (ISAs (UK)) and applicable law. 
Our  responsibilities  under  those  standards  are  further  described  in  the  auditor’s  responsibilities  for  the  audit  of  the 
financial statements section of our report.  

We are independent of the Group and the parent Company in accordance with the ethical requirements that are relevant 
to  our  audit  of  the  financial  statements  in  the  UK,  including  the  Financial  Reporting  Council’s  (the  FRC’s)  Ethical 
Standard as applied to listed entities, and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance with these 
requirements.  

We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion. 

43 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Independent Auditor's Report to the Members of Idox plc (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

3.  Summary of our audit approach 

Key audit matters 

The key audit matters that we identified in the current year were: 

revenue recognition; 

 
  valuation of goodwill and intangible assets;  
  completeness and valuation of provisions for onerous contracts; 
  presentation and disclosure of prior year adjustments in relation to revenue recognition 

and onerous contracts; and 
the impact of Covid-19 pandemic on going concern. 

 

Materiality 

Scoping 

The  materiality  that  we  used  for  the  Group  financial  statements  was  £300,000  which  was 
determined using a blended benchmark considering EBITDA, income before tax and adjusted 
income before tax. 

Our audit covered 90% of the Group’s total revenue, 86% of the Group’s EBITDA and 95% of 
the Group’s total assets. 

Significant changes in 
our approach 

As a result of the identification of a loss making contract during the audit we have considered 
the completeness and valuation of provisions for onerous contracts as a key audit matter.  

We have also considered presentation and disclosure of prior year adjustments in relation to 
revenue recognition and onerous contracts as a key audit matter due to the historic revenue 
recognition irregularities. 

Given the unprecedented level of uncertainty in the global economy arising from the Covid-19 
pandemic, we have also included the impact on going concern as a key audit matter. 

There were no other significant changes in our approach other than the new key audit matters 
identified in the current year.  

4.  Conclusions relating to going concern 

We are required by ISAs (UK) to report in respect of the following matters where: 

We  have  nothing  to  report  in 
respect of these matters. 

 

 

the Directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting in preparation 
of the financial statements is not appropriate; or  
the Directors have not disclosed in the financial statements any identified 
material uncertainties that may cast significant doubt about the Group’s 
or the parent Company’s ability to continue to adopt the going concern 
basis of accounting for a period of at least twelve months from the date 
when the financial statements are authorised for issue. 

5.  Key audit matters 
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit of the 
financial  statements  of  the  current  period  and  include  the  most  significant  assessed  risks  of  material  misstatement 
(whether or not due to fraud) that we identified. These matters included those which had the greatest effect on: the 
overall audit strategy, the allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the engagement team.  

These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the financial statements as a whole, and in forming our 
opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters. 

44 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Independent Auditor's Report to the Members of Idox plc (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

5.1.  Revenue recognition   

Key audit matter 
description 

How the scope of our 
audit responded to the 
key audit matter 

The Group generated £65.5m of revenues (2018: £66.4m from continuing operations) during 
the year from the sale of goods (2019: £23.2m; 2018: £17.3m), being software, hardware and 
consumables,  and the rendering  of services (2019: £42.2m; 2018:  £49.1m). Each  business 
segment  has  its  own  revenue  recognition  policies  (Please  see  note  1  accounting  policies) 
depending  on  the  nature  of  the  revenue  and  underlying  contractual  arrangements. 
Management judgement is required around  the timing of when performance obligations are 
met, as well as the valuation of revenue recognised given the increased level of judgment and 
estimation  on  application  of  principles  set  out  in  IFRS  15  Revenue  from  contracts  with 
customers. This judgment could be the subject of management bias and so we consider that 
this represents a fraud risk.  

Our key audit matter has been pinpointed to the cut-off, accuracy, and occurrence of product 
and service revenue, and the corresponding balance sheet risks of existence and accuracy of 
accrued revenue, and completeness of deferred revenue. 

Further details are provided in note 2 to the financial statements. 

The audit procedures we performed in respect of this matter included: 

  Obtained an understanding of the relevant controls over the recording of revenue; 
 

Testing of product and service revenue for one month pre year-end and one month post 
year-end, in order to assess the cut-off, agreeing each sampled item to invoice details 
and evidence the performance obligations have been met; 

  Confirmations were sent out to corroborate the terms of the contracts held with 

 

 

customers included within the accrued income balance; 
Testing a sample of invoices raised in the year, to ensure they were accounted for in line 
with the Idox revenue recognition policy. Each of these items were traced through to 
invoice, third party support (e.g. purchase order or signed contract) and payment into the 
bank; 
Testing of accrued income, with each selected item agreed to evidence of the split of the 
revenue (service/product/recurring), and also to evidence that the criteria for revenue 
recognition had been met before the year end; and 

  Detailed testing of deferred income, agreeing each item to evidence of the split of the 

revenue (service/product/recurring), and recalculating the portion of income that should 
be deferred based on evidence of the duration of the contract. 

Key observations 

Based on the work performed we concur that all revenue was appropriately recognised in the 
current year. 

45 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Independent Auditor's Report to the Members of Idox plc (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

5.2.  Valuation of goodwill and intangible assets  

Key audit matter 
description 

The  Group  has  goodwill  of  £48.1m  (2018:  £45.9m)  and  other  intangible  assets  of  £37.9m 
(2018:  £32.9m)  as  at  31  October  2019.  As  required  by  IAS  36  Impairment  of  assets 
management performs an impairment review for all goodwill balances on an annual basis, and 
for other assets whenever an indication of impairment is identified. 

How the scope of our 
audit responded to the 
key audit matter 

This has been identified as a key audit matter as a result of the quantitative significance of the 
balances,  and  the  application  of  management  judgement  and  estimation  in  performing 
impairment reviews for the PSS and EIM groups of Cash-Generating Units (CGU) in particular 
as significant components of the total intangible asset amount.  

Determination  of  the  recoverable  amount  incorporates  judgements  based  on  assumptions 
about  future  operating  cash  flows  for  the  related  businesses,  using  assumptions  around 
discount rate, growth rates, and cash flow forecasts. Our key audit matter is focused around 
the  most  sensitive  and  judgemental  assumptions,  being  the  forecast  cash  flows  in 
management’s assessment of recoverable amount based on value-in-use, and the discount 
rates applied to the cash flows. 

Further details are provided in note 12 to the financial statements. 

The audit procedures we performed in respect of this matter included: 

  Obtained an understanding of the relevant controls over the carrying value of goodwill 

and other intangible assets, in particular the controls over the forecasts that underpin the 
value in use models, and controls around management’s selection of the discount rate; 

  Challenged management’s assessment of the cash flow assumptions in determining 

value-in-use, including sensivities, by assessing historical accuracy of forecasting and 
budgeting accuracy, reviewing sales order book and third party evidence where 
available; 

  Agreed cash flow forecasts to board approved budgets including net working capital and 

capital expenditure; 

  Performed sensitivity analysis on key assumptions based on comparison to readily 

available economic and industry data; 

  Engaged our valuations specialist to perform a review of the discount rate applied; and 
  Assessed management’s disclosure of sensitivity within the EIM CGU grouping 

Key observations 

Based on the work performed we concluded that the valuation of goodwill and intangible assets 
was appropriate, and that appropriate disclosure has been made in relation to sensitivities that 
could give rise to future impairment. 

46 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Independent Auditor's Report to the Members of Idox plc (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

5.3.  Completeness and valuation of provisions for onerous contracts  

Key audit matter 
description 

How the scope of our 
audit responded to the 
key audit matter 

During  the  audit,  we  concluded  that  a  loss-making  contract,  which  was  identified  by 
management through their business review process, had not been accounted for correctly. IAS 
37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets requires provision to recognised if 
an entity has a contract that is onerous and as such a provision of £0.6m at 31 October 2018 
and  £0.4m  at  31  October  2019  should  be  recognised.  Please  see  page  41  of  the  audit 
committee report and note 1 prior year adjustment disclosures for further information. Please 
see section 5.4 below for details of the work performed and conclusions reached on whether 
these amounts have been recorded in the correct period. 

The  identification  of  this  loss  making  contract,  coupled  with  the  deficiency  in  the  internal 
financial  reporting  process  and  controls  designed  to  ensure  such  an  issue  is  accounted  for 
correctly, led to an increase in the scope of the audit to consider the general completeness 
and valuation  of accounting for onerous contracts,  and the identification of this specific key 
audit matter. 

Further details are provided in note 20 to the financial statements. 

The audit procedures we performed in respect of this matter included: 

  Profiled contracts to identify other similar contracts that may exist within the business; 
  Selected a sample of contracts, and reviewed the cost to complete analysis 

management had performed to search for other onerous contract provisions that may be 
required; 
Increased the extent of testing over third party cost of sales, and challenging the 
allocation of these costs to existing contracts; 

 

  Reviewed a sample of the monthly business review packs prepared by business unit 

leads to review for potential other commercial and operational issues which may require 
an onerous contract loss provision or for which the appropriate accounting has not been 
applied due to a financial reporting control deficiency; 

  Reviewed management’s calculation of the required onerous contract provisions, 

assessing the remaining term of the contract and the unavoidable costs of delivering in 
line with the contract terms; and  

  Analysed the nature of the adjustment identified to assess whether it related to error or 

estimation, and the availability of information to identifiy the provision at the prior year 
end.  

Key observations 

Based  on  the  procedures  performed,  we  concur  with  managements’  conclusion  that  the 
provision  for  onerous  contracts  is  appropriate  and  includes  all  contracts  that  are  in  a  loss 
making position.  

47 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Independent Auditor's Report to the Members of Idox plc (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

5.4.  Presentation and disclosure of prior year adjustments arising from revenue recognition and onerous 

contracts  

Key audit matter 
description 

How the scope of our 
audit responded to the 
key audit matter 

In March 2019, and as described in the Group’s regulatory announcement on 29 March 2019 
and  its  Interim  Results  announced  22  July  2019,  management  identified  three  instances  of 
irregularities  in  historic  customer  contracts,  signed  and  recognised  in  the  year  ended  31 
October  2016.  These  contracts  had  been  inappropriately  amended  by  a  small  number  of 
employees  whom  have  since  left  the  Idox  Group.  This  amounted  to  revenue  and  £0.5m  of 
accrued income remaining as at 31 October 2018 that should not be have been recognised.  

In  addition,  during  the  reviews  required  to  transition  to  IFRS  15  which  required  detailed 
considerations of performance obligations under all contracts, it was identified that there was 
an additional overstatement of revenue in prior periods. Revenue had been recognised relating 
to three specific and discrete sets of circumstances where revenue were either recognised in 
the  incorrect  period,  or  should  not  have  been  recognised  at  all.  The  total  impact  of  these 
adjustments is to reduce prior year revenue by £1.0m. 

As  noted  in  section  5.3  above,  there  is  an  adjustment  required  to  recognise  an  onerous 
contract provision of £0.4m at 31 October 2019, £0.6m at 31 October 2018 and £0.9m at 1 
November 2017, which relates to a contract entered into in a prior period.  

IAS 8, Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors, defines prior period 
error as an omission from, and misstatement in, the entity’s financial statement for one or more 
prior periods resulting from a failure to use, or misuse of, reliable information that was available 
when the financial statements were authorised for issue and could reasonably have expected 
to have been obtained and taken into account. When such a determination has been made 
IAS 8 requires restatement where prior period errors have a material impact on the financial 
statements.  It  distinguishes  prior  period  errors  from  accounting  estimates  which,  by  their 
nature,  may  need  to  be  revised  as  additional  information  becomes  known.  IAS  8  defines 
material misstatement as one that could, individually, or collectively, influence the economic 
decisions that users make on the basis of the financial statements. 

Management concluded that the prior period errors noted above, considered in aggregate are 
quantitatively and qualitatively material and a restatement of the prior year financial statement 
is required. 

Given  the  judgements  required  by  management  over  the  period  in  which  the  adjustments 
should  be  recognised,  our  key  audit  matter  focussed  on  whether  the  adjustments  were 
complete, accurate and appropriately presented and disclosed. 

Further details are included within the strategic report on page 13, the audit committee report 
on pages 39 to 41, and critical accounting estimates and judgements in note 1 to the financial 
statements. 

In addition to the procedures set out in relation to the revenue and onerous contract provisions 
note  above,  we  performed  additional  audit  procedures  to  analyse  the  nature  of  the 
adjustments.  These  procedures  were  designed  to  assess  whether  adjustments  related  to 
estimation or error, and the availability of information to make those adjustments at the prior 
year-end. This included: 
  Made direct enquiries of management and reviewing reports produced by management 

in relation to these areas; 

48 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Independent Auditor's Report to the Members of Idox plc (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

  Performed calculations and reviewing source documentation; 
  Reviewed key contracts and understanding the nature of negotiations with the customer 

to assess the point at which it became onerous; 

  Assessed the information available, or which could have been reasonably expected to 

be taken into account, as at 31 October 2018;  

  Reviewed prior year working papers and our wider audit procedures to search for 

contradictory evidence that prior year errors were different to those proposed by 
management; and 

  Reviewed the proposed disclosure in the financial statements in relation to any prior 

year adjustment.  

Based on the work performed we concluded that management’s judgement, that the impact of 
the identified prior year errors are cumulatively material and so a restatement of the prior period 
financial  statements  is  required,  was  reasonable  and  that  this  has  been  appropriately 
accounted for and disclosed. 

Key observations 

5.5.  The impact of Covid-19 pandemic on going concern  

Key audit matter 
description 

There  is  unprecedented  level  of  economic  uncertainty  arising  from  the  Covid-19  pandemic. 
Assessing the impact of this on going concern resulted in considerable focus and time being 
spent by both management and the audit team. 

There is a challenge in modelling for the impact of the Covid-19 pandemic given the rapidly 
changing  situation  in  the  UK  and  the  wide-reaching  changes  in  government  policy. 
Management  spent  time  modelling  different  scenarios  which  may  occur  as  a  result  of  the 
Covid-19  pandemic.  These  scenarios  included  several  out  turns  with  revenue  and  EBITDA 
dropping 18% and 29% respectively during the remainder of 2020 and the full impact lasting 
through to October 2021. Whilst no material uncertainty was identified, we revised our audit 
plan  to  take  account  of  these  additional  considerations  when  assessing  the  going  concern 
conclusion. 

Under  the  various  different  scenarios  presented  by  management,  the  Directors  have 
concluded that the going concern assumption remains appropriate. 

Further details are included within the Chairman’s statement on page 3, the audit committee 
report on page 41 to 42, note 1 going concern on page 58 to 60 and post balance sheet events 
in note 31 to the financial statements. 

The audit procedures we performed in respect of this matter included: 

  Reassessed  our  risk  assessment  on  going  concern  for  the  impact  of  the  Covid-19 

pandemic; 

  Obtained  an  understanding  of  the  processes  and  controls  involved  in  management’s 

going concern assessment in light of the Covid-19 pandemic; 
Tested the integrity of management’s updated going concern model; 

 
  Assessed the reasonableness of the scenarios identified by management, reverse stress 
testing performed, and key assumptions used by management in determining the impact 
of the Covid-19 pandemic on going concern; 

  Assessed management's ability to execute mitigating actions, as required, in light of the 

Covid-19 pandemic; 

How the scope of our 
audit responded to the 
key audit matter 

49 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Independent Auditor's Report to the Members of Idox plc (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Key observations 

  Recalculated  management’s  forecast  covenant  compliance  calculations  throughout  the 

going concern period; and 

  Assessed the adequacy of disclosures related to the impact of the Covid-19 pandemic on 

going concern made in the financial statements. 

Based  on  the  work  performed  we  concluded  that  the  scenarios  identified  by  management, 
reverse stress testing performed and key assumptions made in assessing the impact of the 
Covid-19  pandemic  were  reasonable  and  that  the  conclusions  on  going  concern  are 
appropriate. 

6.  Our application of materiality 
6.1.  Materiality 
We  define  materiality  as  the  magnitude  of  misstatement  in  the  financial  statements  that  makes  it  probable  that  the 
economic decisions of a reasonably knowledgeable person would be changed or influenced. We use materiality both 
in planning the scope of our audit work and in evaluating the results of our work. 

Based on our professional judgement, we determined materiality for the financial statements as a whole as follows: 

Group financial statements 

Parent Company financial statements 

Materiality 

£300,000 (2018: £415,000) 

£120,000 (2018: £166,000) 

Parent  Company  materiality  equates  to  3% 
(2018:  3%)  of  net  assets  which  has  been 
capped  at  40% 
(2018:  40%)  of  Group 
materiality. 

As this is the ultimate holding Company for the 
Group, the key balances are investments held, 
external 
intercompany 
balances. 

borrowings 

and 

Basis for 
determining 
materiality 

We  determined  materiality  using  a  blended 
benchmark considering EBITDA, income before 
tax,  and  adjusted  income  before  tax.  The 
tax  benchmark 
adjusted 
normalises  the  profit  figure  for  the  impact  of 
amortisation 
is 
consistent with prior year.  

from  acquisitions.  This 

income  before 

Rationale for the 
benchmark 
applied 

We have used this blended benchmark for our 
determination  of  materiality  having  considered 
the  important  metrics  of  the  business  for 
different stakeholder groups.  

As a listed business shareholders are interested 
in a statutory measure of income before tax as 
an  indicator  of  ability  to  pay  dividends  and 
overall  performance  of  the  business.  From 
review of analysts’ reports, banking agreements 
and  management  reporting  it  suggests  that 
EBITDA 
these 
stakeholders.  

is  of  most 

importance 

for 

income  before 

We have also considered the large gap between 
EBITDA  and 
tax  which 
predominantly  arises  due  to  amortisation  of 
acquisition  related  intangible  assets,  and  have 
therefore  adjusted  income  before  tax  for  this 
amortisation  in  arriving  at  an  adjusted  income 
before tax. 

50 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Independent Auditor's Report to the Members of Idox plc (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

6.2.  Performance materiality 
We set performance materiality at a level lower than materiality to reduce the probability that, in aggregate, uncorrected 
and  undetected  misstatements  exceed  the  materiality  for  the  financial  statements  as  a  whole.  Group  performance 
materiality was set at 60% of Group materiality for the 2019 audit (2018: 70%). In determining performance materiality, 
we  considered  the  following  factors:  our  risk  assessment,  including  our  assessment  of  the  Group’s  overall  control 
environment and the fact we did not plan to rely on controls; our past experience of the audit; and identification of prior 
period adjustments. 

6.3.  Error reporting threshold 
We agreed with the Audit Committee that we would report to the Committee all audit differences in excess of £9,000 
(2018:  £12,500),  as  well  as  differences  below  that  threshold  that,  in  our  view,  warranted  reporting  on  qualitative 
grounds. We also report to the Audit Committee on disclosure matters that we identified when assessing the overall 
presentation of the financial statements. 

Identification and scoping of components 

7.  An overview of the scope of our audit 
7.1. 
Our Group audit was scoped by obtaining an understanding of the Group and its environment through discussions with 
finance, IT and commercial teams and performing walkthroughs of processes across these areas, including Group wide 
controls, and assessing the risks of material misstatement at a Group level.  

The  Group  operates  globally  with  material  revenues  being  generated  in  the  United  Kingdom,  the  United  States  of 
America, Europe and Australia. Revenues are split across the following segments: Public Sector Software, Engineering 
Information Management, and Content.  

On a legal entity basis, the significant components to the Group are Idox Plc, Idox Software Ltd, Idox Health Limited, 
6PM Limited, and McLaren Software Inc.   

These components represent 75% (2018: 82%) of the Group’s revenue, 80% (2018: 86%) of the Group’s EBITDA and 
93% (2018: 86%) of the Group’s total assets. Specified procedures have also been performed over revenue, accrued 
and deferred income within Idox Germany GmbH and Idox Netherlands. This adds an additional 15% of coverage over 
revenue, 6% of EBITDA and 2% over total assets. 

14%

6%

2%

5%

EBITDA

Total assets

80%

93%

Full audit scope

Full audit scope

Specified audit procedures

Specified audit procedures

Review at group level

Review at group level

During the year (and in prior year) all necessary work was performed by the Group engagement team and therefore no 
reliance was placed on work with other auditors. All non-significant components were subject to analytical review by 
the Group audit team.  

51 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Independent Auditor's Report to the Members of Idox plc (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Our audit work on components was executed at levels of materiality applicable to each individual entity, which were 
lower than Group materiality. Component materialities fall within the range of £120,000 to £210,000 (2018: £166,000 
to £291,000). 

At the Group level, we also tested the consolidation process. 

7.2.  Our consideration of the control environment  
During our audit we did not plan to rely on IT controls, nor on controls over business cycles. This decision was taken 
after  taking  consideration  of  a  number  of  factors  including:  the  level  of  changes  across  the  Group  in  underlying 
processes and system of reporting; the implementation of the Board’s improved governance processes; timing of when 
changes to processes and controls were implemented during the year; level of change in client personnel; and the fact 
that prior year errors were indicative of control weaknesses requiring remediation. 

As  documented  in  Corporate  Governance  Report  (page  34)  and  in  section  5.3  above  a  financial  reporting  control 
deficiency  was  identified  during  the  audit  relating  to  the  accounting  for  onerous  contracts.  Section  5.3  sets  out  the 
background  to  the  deficiency,  and  the  additional  work  we  performed  having  identified  this  issue.  Management  has 
reviewed this issue and proposed control and process changes to be implemented, which have been discussed and 
approved by the Audit Committee as detailed on page 41. 

8.  Other information 
The Directors are responsible for the other information. The other information comprises the information included in the 
annual report other than the financial statements and our auditor’s report thereon. 

Our  opinion  on  the  financial  statements  does  not  cover  the  other  information  and,  except  to  the  extent  otherwise 
explicitly stated in our report, we do not express any form of assurance conclusion thereon. 

In connection with our audit of the financial statements, our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing 
so, consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent with the financial  statements or our knowledge 
obtained in the audit or otherwise appears to be materially misstated. 

If we identify such material inconsistencies or apparent material misstatements, we are required to determine whether 
there  is  a  material  misstatement  in  the  financial  statements  or  a  material  misstatement  of  the  other  information.  If, 
based on the work we have performed, we conclude that there is a material misstatement of this other information, we 
are required to report that fact. 

We have nothing to report in respect of these matters. 

9.  Responsibilities of Directors 
As explained more fully in the directors’ responsibilities statement, the Directors are responsible for the preparation of 
the financial statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view, and for such internal control as the 
Directors  determine  is  necessary  to  enable  the  preparation  of  financial  statements  that  are  free  from  material 
misstatement, whether due to fraud or error. 

In  preparing  the  financial  statements,  the  Directors  are  responsible  for  assessing  the  Group’s  and  the  parent 
Company’s ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing as applicable, matters related to going concern and using 
the going concern basis of accounting unless the Directors either intend to liquidate the Group or the parent Company 
or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so. 

10.  Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements 
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free from 
material  misstatement,  whether  due  to  fraud  or  error,  and  to  issue  an  auditor’s  report  that  includes  our  opinion. 
Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with 
ISAs (UK) will always detect a material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and 

52 

 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Independent Auditor's Report to the Members of Idox plc (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

are considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic 
decisions of users taken on the basis of these financial statements. 

A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is located on the FRC’s website at: 
www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. This description forms part of our auditor’s report. 

Report on other legal and regulatory requirements 

11.  Opinions on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006 

In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit: 

 

 

the information given in the strategic report and the directors’ report for the financial year for which the financial 
statements are prepared is consistent with the financial statements; and 
the strategic report and the directors’ report have been prepared in accordance with applicable legal 
requirements. 

In the light of the knowledge and understanding of the Group and the parent Company and their environment 
obtained in the course of the audit, we have not identified any material misstatements in the strategic report or the 
directors’ report. 

12.  Matters on which we are required to report by exception 
12.1. 
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion: 

Directors’ remuneration 

•  we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit; or 
• 

adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent Company, or returns adequate for our audit 
have not been received from branches not visited by us; or 
the parent Company financial statements are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns. 

• 

We have nothing to report in respect of these matters. 

Directors’ remuneration 

12.2. 
Under  the  Companies  Act  2006  we  are  also  required  to  report  if  in  our  opinion  certain  disclosures  of  Directors’ 
remuneration have not been made. 

We have nothing to report in respect of these matters. 

13.  Use of our report 
This  report  is  made  solely  to  the  Company’s  members,  as  a  body,  in  accordance  with  Chapter  3  of  Part  16  of  the 
Companies Act 2006. Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the Company’s members those 
matters we are required to state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted 
by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than the Company and the Company’s members as 
a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed. 

David Mitchell, CA (Senior statutory auditor) 
For and on behalf of Deloitte LLP 
Statutory Auditor 
Glasgow, United Kingdom 
10 April 2020 

53 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Continuing operations 
Revenue 
Cost of sales 
Gross profit 
Administrative expenses 
Operating profit / (loss) 

Analysed as: 
Earnings before depreciation, amortisation, restructuring, 
acquisition costs, impairment, financing costs and share 
option costs 
Depreciation 
Amortisation 
Restructuring costs 
Acquisition (costs) / credit 
Impairment 
Financing costs 
Share option costs 

Finance income 
Finance costs 

Loss before taxation  

Income tax (charge) / credit 

Loss for the year from continuing operations 

Discontinued operations 

Loss for the year from discontinued operations 

Loss for the year 

Non-controlling interest 

Note

2 

2 
3 
3 
3 
5 

25 

6 
6 

8 

9 

2019 
£000 

65,492 
(19,481) 
46,011 
(44,334) 
1,677 

14,361 
(839) 
(8,289) 
(2,155) 
(174) 
- 
(368) 
(859) 

172 
(1,874) 

(25) 

(1,192) 

(1,217) 

(602) 

(1,819) 

113 

 Restated* 
2018 
£000 

66,414 
(18,115) 
48,299 
(77,200) 
(28,901) 

13,639 
(1,106) 
(8,213) 
(436) 
856 
(33,255) 
(336) 
(50) 

449 
(1,788) 

(30,240) 

2,680 

(27,560) 

(9,067) 

(36,627) 

6 

Loss for the year attributable to the owners of the parent 

(1,706) 

(36,621) 

Other comprehensive loss for the year 
Items that will be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss: 
Exchange losses on translation of foreign operations net of tax 
Other comprehensive loss for the year, net of tax 
Total comprehensive loss for the year  
Total comprehensive loss for the year attributable to 
owners of the parent  

Earnings per share attributable to owners of the parent 
during the year 
From continuing operations 
Basic 
Diluted 

From continuing and discontinued operations 
Basic 
Diluted 

10 
10 

10 
10 

(180) 
(180) 
(1,999) 

(1,886) 

(0.26)p 
(0.26)p 

(0.41)p 
(0.41)p 

*See Note 1 for restatement reconciliation 
The accompanying accounting policies and notes form an integral part of these financial statements. 

(133) 
(133) 
(36,760) 

(36,754) 

(6.67)p 
(6.67)p 

(8.86)p 
(8.86)p 

54 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated Balance Sheet 

At 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 
  Restated 
2017 
£000 

Restated 
2018 
£000 

2019 
£000 

Note 

11 
12 
13 
14 

16 

17 

9 

18 
19 
19 
20 

22 

9 

14 
19 
19 
20 
21 
22 

24 

ASSETS 
Non-current assets 
Property, plant and equipment 
Intangible assets 
Investment 
Deferred tax assets 
Total non-current assets 

Current assets 
Stock 
Trade and other receivables 
Current tax receivable 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Total current assets 

Assets classified as held for sale 
Total assets 

LIABILITIES 
Current liabilities 
Trade and other payables 
Deferred consideration 
Other liabilities 
Provisions 
Current tax payable 
Borrowings 
Total current liabilities 

Liabilities directly associated with assets 
classified as held for sale 

Non-current liabilities 
Deferred tax liabilities 
Deferred consideration 
Other liabilities 
Provisions 
Bonds in issue 
Borrowings 
Total non-current liabilities 
Total liabilities 
Net assets 

EQUITY 
Called up share capital 
Capital redemption reserve 
Share premium account 
Treasury reserve 
Share option reserve 
Other reserves 
ESOP trust 
Foreign currency translation reserve 
Retained earnings 
Issued capital and reserves attributable 
to the owners of the parent 
Non-controlling interest 
Total equity 

1,162 
86,004 
18 
1,368 
88,552 

77 
19,972 
251 
7,023 
27,323 

- 
115,875 

7,136 
381 
23,892 
384 
- 
21,809 
53,602 

1,211 
78,787 
18 
1,107 
81,123 

115 
32,502 
1,382 
5,534 
39,533 

1,114 
121,770 

7,957 
750 
21,201 
356 
- 
3,289 
33,553 

1,743 
122,754 
18 
1,086 
125,601 

163 
42,216 
- 
3,248 
45,627 

- 
171,228 

10,893 
1,600 
25,746 
427 
190 
3,102 
41,958 

- 

963 

- 

4,015 
74 
1,878 
111 
11,584 
- 
17,662 
71,264 
44,611 

4,446 
1,112 
41,348 
(621) 
1,837 
7,528 
(365) 
(64) 
(10,500) 
44,721 

(110) 
44,611 

3,724 
- 
1,288 
378 
11,491 
22,505 
39,386 
73,902 
47,868 

4,169 
1,112 
34,188 
(621) 
1,232 
7,528 
(399) 
116 
540 
47,865 

3 
47,868 

7,010 
- 
1,616 
645 
11,238 
21,519 
42,028 
83,986 
87,242 

4,145 
1,112 
34,109 
(621) 
1,730 
7,528 
(349) 
249 
39,330 
87,233 

9 
87,242 

The financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors and authorised for issue on 9 April 2020 and are signed on its 
behalf by: 

David Meaden  
Chief Executive Officer 
The accompanying accounting policies and notes form an integral part of these financial statements. 
Company name: Idox plc  

Rob Grubb 
Chief Financial Officer 

Company number: 03984070

55 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity 

At 31 October 2019 
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 

Called up 
share 
capital 
£000 

Capital 
redemption 
reserve 
£000 

Share 
premium 
account 
£000 

Treasury 
reserve 
£000 

Share 
option 
reserve 
£000 

Other 
reserves 
£000 

ESOP 
trust 
£000 

Foreign 
currency 
translation 
reserve 
£000 

Restated 
retained 
earnings 
£000 

Non-
controlling 
interest* 
£000 

Balance at 1 November 2017 
FY19 Prior period adjustment (note 1) 
Restated balance at 1 November 2017 

Issue of share capital 
Share option costs 
Exercise of share options 
ESOP trust 
Equity dividends paid 

Transactions with owners 

Loss for the year 
FY19 Prior period adjustment (note 1) 
Non-controlling interest 
Other comprehensive loss 
Exchange movement on translation of foreign 
operations 

Total comprehensive loss for the year 

4,145 
- 
4,145 
24 
- 
- 
- 
- 

24 

- 
- 
- 

- 

- 

1,112 
- 
1,112 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
- 
- 

- 

- 

34,109 
- 
34,109 
79 
- 
- 
- 
- 

79 

- 
- 
- 

- 

- 

(621) 
- 
(621) 
- 
- 

- 
- 

- 

- 
- 
- 

- 

- 

1,730 
- 
1,730 
- 
50 
(548) 
- 
- 

(498) 

- 
- 
- 

- 

- 

7,528 
- 
7,528 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
- 
- 

- 

- 

(349) 
- 
(349) 
- 
- 
- 
(50) 
- 

(50) 

- 
- 
- 

- 

- 

Restated Balance at 31 October 2018 

4,169 

1,112 

34,188 

(621) 

1,232 

7,528 

(399) 

IFRS 15 opening adjustment 
IFRS 15 deferred tax opening adjustment 

Issue of share capital 
Share option costs 
Exercise / lapses of share options 
ESOP trust 

Transactions with owners 

Loss for the year 
Non-controlling interest  
Other comprehensive loss  
Exchange movement on translation of foreign 
operations 

Total comprehensive loss for the year 

- 
- 

277 
- 
- 
- 

277 

- 
- 

- 

- 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
- 

- 

- 

- 
- 

7,160 
- 
- 
- 

7,160 

- 
- 

- 

- 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
- 

- 

- 

- 
- 

- 
859 
(254) 
- 

605 

- 
- 

- 

- 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
- 

- 

- 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
34 

34 

- 
- 

- 

- 

249 
- 
249 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
- 
- 

(133) 

(133) 

116 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
- 

40,669 
(1,339) 
39,330 
- 
- 
548 
- 
(2,717) 

(2,169) 

(36,042) 
(579) 
- 

- 

(36,621) 

540 

(11,532) 
1,944 

- 
- 
254 
- 

254 

(1,706) 
- 

(180) 

(180) 

- 

(1,706) 

At 31 October 2019 

4,446 

1,112 

41,348 

(621) 

1,837 

7,528 

(365) 

(64) 

(10,500) 

The accompanying accounting policies and notes form an integral part of these financial statements. 
*relates to a 30% non-controlling interest Six-PM Health Solutions (Ireland) Ltd, a subsidiary of 6PM Holdings plc.

9 
- 
9 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
- 
(6) 

- 

(6) 

3 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
(113) 

- 

(113) 

(110) 

56 

Total 
£000 

88,581 
(1,339) 
87,242 
103 
50 
- 
(50) 
(2,717) 

(2,614) 

(36,042) 
(579) 
(6) 

(133) 

(36,760) 

47,868 

(11,532) 
1,944 

7,437 
859 
- 
34 

8,330 

(1,706) 
(113) 

(180) 

(1,999) 

44,611 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated Cash Flow Statement 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

Note 

11 
12 

25 

Cash flows from operating activities 
Loss for the year before taxation 
Adjustments for: 
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment 
Amortisation of intangible assets 
Acquisition credits - release of deferred consideration 
Impairment 
Finance income 
Finance costs 
Debt issue costs amortisation 
Research and development tax credit 
Share option costs 
Movement in stock 
Movement in receivables 
Movement in payables 
Cash generated by operations 

Tax on loss refunded / (tax on profit paid) 
Net cash from operating activities 

Cash flows from investing activities 
Acquisition of subsidiaries  
Net cash arising on disposal of discontinued operations 
Purchase of property, plant and equipment 
Purchase of intangible assets 
Finance income 
Net cash used in investing activities 

Cash flows from financing activities 
Interest paid 
New loans 
Loan related costs 
Loan repayments 
Equity dividends paid 
Issue of own shares 
Net cash flows from / (used in) financing activities 

Net movement in cash and cash equivalents 

Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of the year 
Exchange gains on cash and cash equivalents 
Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year 

2019 
£000 

Restated 
2018 
£000 

(627) 

(39,983) 

839 
8,289 
(750) 
- 
(172) 
1,629 
(54) 
(182) 
859 
38 
4,923 
(3,595) 
11,197 

1,185 
12,382 

(6,394) 
44 
(780) 
(5,871) 
172 
(12,829) 

(1,423) 
8,000 
(81) 
(12,039) 
- 
7,350 
1,807 

1,360 

5,534 
129 
7,023 

1,144 
8,615 
(684) 
39,530 
(211) 
1,666 
90 
(832) 
50 
48 
8,671 
(7,456) 
10,648 

(760) 
9,888 

(209) 
- 
(606) 
(3,868) 
211 
(4,472) 

(1,484) 
6,500 
42 
(5,500) 
(2,717) 
(53) 
(3,212) 

2,204 

3,248 
82 
5,534 

The accompanying accounting policies and notes form an integral part of these financial statements.

57 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES 

General information 
Idox  plc  is  a  leading  supplier  of  software  and  services  for  the  management  of  Local  Government  and  other 
organisations. The Company is a public limited company, limited by shares, which is listed on the AIM Market of the 
London Stock Exchange and is incorporated and domiciled in the UK. The address of its registered office is 2nd Floor, 
1310  Waterside,  Arlington  Business  Park,  Theale,  Reading,  RG7  4SA.  The  registered  number  of  the  Company  is 
03984070. 

The financial statements are prepared in pounds sterling. 

Basis of preparation 
These  financial  statements  have  been  prepared  in  accordance  with  International  Financial  Reporting  Standards 
(IFRS)  as  adopted  by  the  European  Union  (EU)  and  the  Companies  Act  2006  applicable  to  companies  reporting 
under IFRS.   

The financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention as modified by the revaluation of 
certain financial assets and liabilities, being, deferred consideration at fair value through profit or loss. 

These  financial  statements  are  available  on  the  Group’s  website:  https://www.idoxgroup.com/investors/financial-
reporting/. 

As  set  out  on  page  28  in  the  Directors’  Report,  the  financial  statements  have  been  prepared  on  a  going  concern 
basis. 

Going concern 
The Directors, having made suitable enquiries and analysis of the accounts, consider that the Group has adequate 
resources  to  continue  in  business  for  the  foreseeable  future.  In  making  this  assessment,  the  Directors  have 
considered the Group’s budget, cash flow forecasts, available banking facility with appropriate headroom in facilities 
and financial covenants, in addition to levels of contracted and recurring revenue. 

It was announced on 19 December 2019 that the Group had refinanced with the Royal Bank of Scotland plc, Silicon 
Valley Bank and Santander UK plc. The new facilities, which comprise a revolving credit facility of £35,000,000 and 
£10,000,000 accordion facility, are committed until December 2022, with an option to extend this commitment for a 
further two years. The new facility is on improved commercial terms with a lower margin grid and standard financial 
covenants in respect of leverage and cash flow cover. 

As the Group has net current liabilities of £26.3m as at 31 October 2019, the Directors have specifically considered 
whether this represents an indication of an issue with the going concern basis for the Group’s accounting, particularly 
as the corresponding balance as at 31 October 2018 was a net current asset position of £6.1m. The Directors have 
identified that: 

 

 

the FY19 closing position includes our £21.8m borrowings which are secured for up to five years, being disclosed 
in less than one year due to the timing of finalising our new banking arrangement post year end, whereas the 
borrowings  in  FY18  were  in  the  main  disclosed  as  greater  than  12  months  due  to  that  refinancing  being  an 
extension of additional facilities, and therefore excluded from current liabilities; and 

in FY19 the Group has seen a large opening accounting, non-cash, adjustment in FY19 that has reduced contract 
receivables and increased contract liabilities by a total of £12.6m following the adoption of IFRS 15.  

After  adjusting  for  these  items  to  present  an  appropriate  year  on  year  comparison,  the  Group’s  net  current  asset 
position has improved by £2m from FY18 to FY19. Therefore, the Directors do not consider the net current liabilities 
reported as at 31 October 2019 to be an indicator of any issue with the Group’s going concern assessment. 

Covid-19 pandemic impact on Going Concern assessment 
Idox along with most companies has been impacted by the emerging Covid-19 pandemic. We continue to assess the 
impact of the Covid-19 pandemic on the business, taking actions to mitigate or limit the impacts on our organisation 
where we can and supporting our staff, customers and partners in dealing with the emerging situation. 

As part of the preparation of our FY19 results, the Group has carefully assessed the likely impact of the Covid-19 
pandemic  on  our  business  and  specifically  considered  if  it  creates  any  material  uncertainty  in  our  going  concern 
assessment.  We  have  considered  in  detail  anticipated  changes  in  the  way  we  engage  with  our  customers,  staff, 
supply chains and banking partners as a result of the Covid-19 pandemic.

58 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED) 

Going concern (continued) 
Idox is fundamentally resilient to the Covid-19 pandemic due to the Group's high recurring revenue base, its focus on 
public sector markets and the high proportion of staff that routinely work from home. The Group retains significant 
liquidity with cash and available committed bank facilities and has strong headroom against financial covenants. We 
continue to monitor the situation as it continues to evolve and adapt our approach as required. 

The Group continues to monitor the impact of the Covid-19 pandemic. Idox is well placed because of the Group's 
high recurring revenue base, its focus on public sector markets and the high proportion of staff that routinely work 
from home.  

The exposures identified to date are as follows: 

  Our Public Sector Software business is exposed to government policy in response to the Covid-19 pandemic, 
notably the recent postponement of the local and mayoral elections originally scheduled for May 2020 to May 
2021 which will impact the Elections sub-segment of this business. However, the overall PSS business has strong 
levels of recurring revenues from a well-established existing customer base and growing markets 

  Our  EIM  business  has  seen  significant  reduction  in  travel  given  its  cross-border  operations  which  has  had  a 
limited  impact  but  we  continue  to  provide  the  majority  of  solutions  and  service  customers  remotely.  Our  EIM 
business also has strong existing high recurring revenues which account for approximately 80% of its revenue 
targets, and is well-placed given its increasing focus on cloud-based solutions. 

  Our  Content  business  has  operations  in  Germany  and  Netherlands,  however,  the  impact  of  the  Covid-19 
pandemic impact to-date has been minimal. We are not anticipating any impact on the UK element of our Content 
business which is all recurring in nature and in respect of public sector customers.  

The Group has introduced a number of cost controls over new and existing spend which, together with linked Cost of 
Sale reductions, will mitigate any potential reduction in revenue from the Covid-19 pandemic. Management continue 
to anticipate future earnings and cash will be in line with its previous expectations.  

We have performed detailed financial forecasting of a number of credible potential Covid-19 pandemic scenarios, as 
well as severe stress-testing in our financial modelling which includes potential restructuring in order to preserve the 
Group as a going concern in the event of the most extreme possible impact on our Group of the Covid-19 pandemic. 

The key assumptions in these scenarios are: 

 

There will be a direct impact period until most of the current restrictions are lifted as well as a recovery period 
until commercial and social life has broadly returned to normal (recovery period). 

  Revenues from existing support and recurring services contracts will not be materially impacted. 

  Revenues from new business and from current projects will be impacted by delays and some cancellation of 

procurements in the current pipeline. 

  Cost management actions will be taken, consistent with these assumptions and the impacts experienced. 

The scenarios considered most credible for the markets in which we operate and the customer base we have are: 

A.  A direct impact period of 3 months and a recovery period of 3 months. This scenario assumes 20% to 50% 
of procurements are delayed but the majority resume. Project work recovers and any backlog is cleared by 
the end of the recovery period. 

B.  A direct impact period of 6 months and a recovery period of 9 months. This scenario assumes 30% to 70% 
of procurements are delayed into the recovery period and a number are cancelled. Project work recovers 
and any backlog is cleared by the end of the longer recovery period. 

We are satisfied these are valid and reasonable assumptions and that the scenarios tested are the most appropriate 
and credible as the Group has high levels of recurring revenue and repeating revenues from a diverse customer base 
across a number of business units. Both scenario A (our anticipated impact based on current information) and scenario 
B (further sensitivity test) demonstrate the business is expected to have significant liquidity available from cash in hand 
and from committed facilities and has strong headroom against financial covenants. In both scenario A and B, the 
Group is forecasting liquidity in excess of £20m and headroom of at least 100% on financial covenants. Therefore, 
this supports the going concern assessment for the business. 

In our severe stress testing financial modelling we have sought to identify an extreme set of circumstances that would 
result in the Group breaching banking covenants and extinguishing its available liquidity. In order to create such a set 
of circumstances we further adjusted scenario B to reduce all Group revenues by 50% for the period April 2020 to 
June 2021, but with no further action on cost.  

59 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED) 

Going concern (continued) 
Whilst it is informative to identify extreme circumstances to test the Group’s liquidity, this scenario is considered highly 
unlikely due to the high levels of recurring revenues the Group has in respect of software that is often either central 
to  the  customer,  or  a  specific  regulatory  requirement  under  statute.  Furthermore,  in  the  event  the  Group  did  find 
revenues deteriorated further beyond the scenario’s modelled, the Group has identified mitigating actions to preserve 
its liquidity. These actions include reducing any operations that may have become severely loss-making due to the 
Covid-19 pandemic either through further reduction in operational spend, restructuring of business units, or utilising 
available government financial support with job retention schemes. 

International Financial Reporting Standards and Interpretations issued but not yet effective 
At  the  date  of  authorisation  of  these  financial  statements,  the  following  new  standards,  amendments  and 
interpretations to existing standards have been published. These are mandatory for forthcoming financial periods, but 
which the Group has not adopted early. These are not expected to have a material impact on the Group’s consolidated 
financial statements: 

 IFRIC 23 Uncertainty over Income Tax Treatments – effective for periods commencing on or after 1 January 2019. 

The  following  standards  have  the  potential  to  have  a  material  impact  on  the  Group’s  consolidated  financial 
statements: 

 IFRS  16  ‘Leases’  –  IFRS  16  presents  new  requirements  for  the  recognition,  measurement,  presentation  and 
disclosure of leases. The standard provides that lessees will be required to recognise assets and liabilities for all 
leases unless the lease term is 12 months or less or the underlying asset has a low value. The standard was 
issued  in  January  2016  and  applies  to  annual  reporting  periods  beginning  on  or  after  1  January  2019.  The 
standard is applicable to the Group for the period beginning 1 November 2019. At this time the group will recognise 
the current leases (note 27) as a series of lease assets (£4.5m) and lease liabilities (£4.9m) using the modified 
retrospective method, when an adjustment will be made to the opening balance of equity. The anticipated impact 
on FY20 is a reduction in profit before tax of £0.1m. 

Adoption of new and revised standards 

 IFRS 15 ‘Revenue from Contracts with Customers’ - the standard was adopted for the first time in the year ending 
31 October 2019. The Group applied IFRS 15 on a cumulative effect basis from the date of initial application (1 
November 2018), without restatement of comparative amounts. The adoption of IFRS 15 does not alter the total 
contract value, the timing of cash flows or the Group’s ability to pay dividends.  

IFRS  15  provides  a  single,  principles-based  five-step  model  to  be  applied  to  all  sales  contracts,  based  on  the 
transfer of control of goods and services to customers. The Group has undertaken a review of all the services and 
products  the  businesses  provide  and  the  main  types  of  commercial  arrangements  used  with  each  service  and 
product. Both the UK and the overseas businesses are impacted by IFRS 15 and the most significant impact of 
implementing the standard is as follows: 
o  Software licence revenue: Under previous accounting policies revenue from software licences was mainly 
recognised as the licences are issued to the customers. For bundled contracts this results in the revenue for 
software licences being recognised earlier than it would be under IFRS 15 as software licences do not meet 
the  criteria  of  being  a  distinct  performance  obligation.  IFRS  15  resulted  in  the  software  licence  fees  in 
bundled contracts being combined with other promises in the contract, specifically implementation services, 
and recognised over the implementation term. This resulted in a delay in revenue previously recognised and 
an increase in contract liabilities going forward. There was no change to the net contract values.  

o  Hardware revenue: Under previous accounting policies revenue from hardware was mainly recognised as 
the hardware is issued to the customers. For bundled contracts this resulted in the revenue for hardware 
being recognised earlier than it would be under IFRS 15 as hardware does not meet the criteria of being a 
distinct performance obligation. IFRS 15 resulted in the hardware fees in bundled contracts being combined 
with  other  promises  in  the  contract,  specifically  implementation  services,  and  recognised  over  the 
implementation term. This resulted in a delay in revenue previously recognised and an increase in contract 
liabilities going forward. There was no change to the net contract values.  

o  Quantitative impact: The following table summarises the entries arising from the adoption of IFRS 15: 

Deferral of revenues previously reported 
Eliminate discounting of contract receivables balances greater than one year    
Associated deferred tax 
IFRS 15 impact 

£000 

11,880 
(348) 
(1,944) 
9,588 

60 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED) 

Adoption of new and revised standards (continued) 

o  Quantitative impact: The impact of adoption of IFRS 15 on our financial statements for the year ended 31 

October 2019 was as follows: 

Restated* 
2018 
£000 

18,432 
1,107 
(17,859) 
(540) 

IFRS 15 
Impact 
£000 

(5,872) 
1,944 
(5,660) 
9,588 

  Opening 
balance 
2019 
£000 

12,560 
3,051 
(23,519) 
9,048 

Contract receivables 
Deferred tax asset 
Contract liabilities 
Retained earnings 

*Balances restated for the impact of prior period adjustments as detailed in the next section. 

Further detail regarding the adoption of IFRS 15 are included within note 2, Segmental Analysis. 

There  were  no  additional  standards,  amendments  and  interpretations  that  had  a  material  impact  on  the  Group’s 
financial statements during the year.  

The following standards, amendments and interpretations were effective in the year but had no material impact on the 
Group’s financial statements: 

 IFRS 9 ‘Financial Instruments’ - an assessment of the impact of moving from recognising bad debt provisions on 
potentially irrecoverable individual trade debtor balances, to calculating expected credit loss scenarios in regards 
to trade debtors was carried out and the results analysed. It was concluded that the impact was not material to 
the financial statements and there was not a significant increase in the credit risk relative to the date  of initial 
recognition. 

We have no expected credit loss scenarios in respect of our contract assets which are in respect of local authority 
entities. 

Restatement of comparative figures 
Reallocation of Cost of Delivery 
There  has  been  a  reallocation  of  £9,588,000  between  Administrative  expenses  and  Cost  of  Sales  in  the  FY18 
comparatives to include an element of employment costs within the Cost of Sales to be more representative of gross 
margin generated from revenue.  

This reallocation has no impact on earnings. 

Contract Irregularities 
In March 2019, the new management team identified a small number of contract documentation irregularities in respect 
to the 2016 year-end. As part of our more stringent approach to contract monitoring and execution we identified three 
instances of irregularities in historic customer contracts, signed and recognised in the year ended 31 October 2016 
(FY16) that had been inappropriately amended by a small number of employees whom have since left the Idox Group.  

These contract irregularities amounted to £497,000, and as a result contract receivables and retained earnings within 
the opening balance sheet for FY18 have been reduced by £497,000. 

Onerous Contract 
Following identification of a loss-making contract during the audit process, it was subsequently identified as an onerous 
contract that should have been recorded in prior periods.  

As a result of this contract being identified, the Audit Committee commissioned a review of all material contracts in the 
Group  and  commissioned  a  report  by  the  Group’s  Chief  Process  and  Transformation  Officer  to  identify  how  the 
onerous contract had not previously been identified. These reviews concluded there were no other such examples of 
onerous  contracts  within  the  Group  and  resulted  in  several  recommendations  to  strengthen  the  link  between 
operational controls and financial reporting which the Audit Committee and Executive Management have fully adopted. 

As  a  result,  an  onerous  contract  provision  of  £911,000  has  been  recorded  and  an  associated  revision  to  brought-
forward retained earnings as at 31 October 2017. This provision has been partially realised by £267,000 in the restated 
FY18 Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income, with a remaining onerous contract provision of £644,000 
as at 31 October 2018 and £378,000 as at 31 October 2019. 

61 

 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED) 

Restatement of comparative figures (continued) 
Other Items 
In addition to the adjustments noted above, there were further contracts identified, during the IFRS 15 review, in which 
revenue  overstatements  in  prior  periods  have  been  identified  whereby  revenue  was  recognised  by  previous 
Management teams despite not being permissible under IAS 18 Revenue, the applicable accounting standard at the 
time.  Management  has  concluded  whilst  these  overstatements  in  respect  of  prior  periods  individually  are  not 
significant, they are of sufficient quantum cumulatively to be represented as a prior year adjustment in these financial 
statements.  

As a result of these adjustments, the impact on the prior year’s results are noted in the table below: 

Pre FY18 

 £000 

FY18 

 £000 

Reduction in revenue 

(30)  

      (1,029)  

Increase in administrative expenses 

- 

(16) 

(30) 

(1,045) 

Reduction in contract receivables 

           (30)  

       (194)  

Increase in accruals 

- 

(16) 

Increase in contract liabilities 

                 -  

        (835)  

(30) 

(1,045) 

Overall 
The following tables summarise the impact of the reclassification of employment costs and the prior period errors in 
the financial statements of the Group.  

Consolidated Statement of 
Comprehensive Income 

Reclassification  

Prior Period Adjustments 

Contract 
Irregularities  
£000 

Onerous 
Contract 
£000 

Other 
Items 
£000 

£000 

31 October 
2018 

£000 

(26,981) 

Loss for the year from continuing 
operations as originally presented 

Reclassification of employment 
costs: 
Cost of sales 
Employment costs 

Restatement due to contract 
irregularities and other contract 
reviews: 
Revenue 
Cost of sales 
Administrative expenses 
Income tax 

Loss for the year from continuing 
operations as restated 

(9,588) 
9,588 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 

- 
- 

(9,588) 
9,588 

- 
267 
- 
- 

(1,029) 
- 
(16) 
199 

(1,029) 
267 
(16) 
199 

(27,560) 

62 

 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
   
 
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED) 

Restatement of comparative figures (continued) 

Consolidated Balance Sheet 

Opening retained earnings as at 1 November 
2017 as presented in FY18 Annual Report 

Restatement of:  
FY17 trade and other receivables 
FY 17 provisions 
FY17 current tax payable 

Opening retained earnings as restated 

Closing Net assets as originally presented 

Restatement of: 
Trade and other receivables   
Current tax receivable 
Trade and other payables 
Other liabilities 
Provisions 

Closing Net assets as restated 

Contract 
Irregularities 
£000 

Onerous 
Contract 
£000 

Other 
Items 
£000 

31 October 
2018 
£000 

(497) 
- 
- 

- 
(911) 
- 

(30) 
- 
99 

(497) 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 

- 

(644) 

(224) 
298 
(16) 
(835) 
- 

40,669 

(527) 
(911) 
99 

39,330 

49,786 

 (721) 
298 
(16) 
(835) 
(644) 

47,868 

Earnings per share from continuing and discontinued operations 

31 October 2018 

Basic EPS as originally presented 
Impact on loss for the year (£000) 
Basic EPS as restated 

Diluted EPS as originally presented 
Impact on loss for the year (£000) 
Diluted EPS as restated 

(8.72)p 
(579) 
(8.86)p 

(8.65)p 
(579) 
(8.86)p 

Critical judgements and key sources of estimation uncertainty  
In applying the Group’s accounting policies, the Directors are required to make judgements (other than those involving 
estimations) that have a significant impact on the amounts recognised and to make estimates and assumptions about 
the  carrying  amounts  of  assets  and  liabilities  that  are  not  easily  apparent  from  other  sources.  The  estimates  and 
associated assumptions are based on historical experience and other factors that are considered to be relevant. Actual 
results may differ from these estimates. 

The estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting estimates are 
recognised in the period in which the estimate is revised if the revision affects only that period, or in the period of the 
revision and future periods if the revision affects both current and future periods. 

Judgements (not involving estimation) 
Management considers the following items to be critical judgements (apart from those involving estimations) that were 
made in the process of applying the Group’s accounting policies in the reporting period that are deemed to have the 
most significant effect on the amounts recognised in financial statements: 

63 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED) 

Development costs 
Judgement is exercised in the expenditure that is capitalised or alternatively expensed as research. This is governed 
by the Group’s capitalisation policy, which describes the nature and type of costs that should be capitalised to ensure 
consistency across the Group. Creation and application of this Group capitalisation policy requires judgement in how 
IFRS is applied to Idox in describing which expenditure qualifies for capitalisation as well as the thresholds that are 
applied.   

The  recognition  requirements  of  development  costs  are  reviewed  quarterly.  This  is  necessary  as  the  economic 
success  of  any  product  development  is  uncertain  and  may  be  subject  to  future  technical  problems  at  the  time  of 
recognition. Judgements are based on the information available at each review. In addition, all internal activities related 
to the research and development of new software products are continuously monitored by the Directors.  

Capitalised development is reviewed on an individual project basis and management will select the most appropriate 
rate of amortisation for each asset. Amortisation is typically 5 years depending on the future revenue projected for 
each individual asset.  

See note 12 for further information. 

Revenue recognition 
Management  assesses  both  legal  paperwork  and  the  underlying  commercial  specifics  of  transactions,  alongside 
accounting standards, to determine revenue recognition treatment. This assessment could involve internal chartered 
accountants, internal legal staff, operational staff and professional advice where appropriate. 

The adoption of IFRS 15 from 1 November 2018 has been a key revenue recognition consideration for the Group this 
period and going forward. The Group has prepared an underlying technical framework to substantiate current and 
ongoing judgements on revenue recognition. 

Management exercise judgement over various elements of a contract, for example: 

the point at which the customer takes full control of any bundled software solution ; 
an estimate of the value of the underlying elements of a bundled software solution ; and 

 
 
  whether it is appropriate to recognise revenue on certain contracts prior to an invoice being raised, where 
work has been completed and there is a high degree of certainty of the contract being completed, with the 
invoice raised and cash received. 

The underlying technical framework is used to inform and support areas of judgement, of the type mentioned in these 
examples.  

Key sources of estimation uncertainty 
Management consider the following items to involve key assumptions and other sources of estimation uncertainty. 
These items generate a significant risk of causing a material adjustment to the carrying amount of assets and liabilities 
in the next financial year. 

Impairment of goodwill 
Management is required to test, at least annually, whether goodwill has suffered any impairment. The recoverable 
amount  is  determined  based  upon  value-in-use  and  net  realisable  value  calculations.  The  value-in-use  method 
requires the calculation of future cash flows and the choice of a suitable discount rate in order to calculate the present 
value of these cash flows. Pre-tax discount rates have been applied and are based on WACC calculations performed 
and supplied by independent valuation specialists. See note 12 for further commentary and associated risk in relation 
to the EIM division. 

Basis of consolidation 
The Group financial statements consolidate the financial statements of the Company and its subsidiary undertakings 
drawn  up  to  31  October  each  year.  Under  IFRS  10,  control  exists  when  an  investor  is  exposed,  or  has  rights,  to 
variable returns from its involvement with the investee and has the ability to affect those returns through its powers 
over the investee. As each of the subsidiaries are 100% wholly owned, with the exception of 6PM Ireland which is 
adjusted for non-controlling interest, the Group has full control over each of its investees. 

All inter-company transactions are eliminated on consolidation.  

64 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED) 

Basis of consolidation (continued) 
For business combinations occurring since 1 November 2009, the requirements of IFRS 3R have been applied. The 
consideration transferred by the Group to obtain control of a subsidiary is calculated as the sum of the fair values at 
acquisition date of assets, liabilities incurred and the equity interests issued by the Group, which includes the fair value 
of any asset or liability arising from a contingent consideration arrangement.    

Acquisition  costs  are  expensed  as  incurred.  For  all  acquisitions,  the  Group  will  perform  a  fair  value  review  of  all 
property, plant and equipment, intangible assets, and accrued and deferred balances to align accounting policies with 
the Group.  

Revenue 
Revenue represents the income arising in the course of an entity’s ordinary activities, net of value added tax and after 
eliminating sales within the Group. 

Where work has been completed but the performance obligation has not been fully satisfied, the income has been 
accrued and included in contract receivables on the balance sheet. 

The Group derives its revenue from six revenue streams, as follows: 

Recurring: Managed Services 
Revenue from recurring managed services is recognised evenly across the managed service period, in line with the 
pattern of how we deliver the services and how they are consumed by the customer. 

Recurring: Hosting 
Revenue from  recurring hosting is recognised evenly across the hosting period, in line  with the pattern of how we 
deliver the services and how they are consumed by the customer. 

Non-Recurring: Services 
Revenue from non-recurring services is recognised over the course of the service provision in line with agreed delivery 
milestones as control of the environment is progressively transferred to the customer. 

Non-Recurring: Hardware 
Revenue on hardware is recognised when control of the asset is passed to the customer which typically occurs on 
delivery. 

Recurring: Software (Recurring Licence Fee (RLF) and Support & Maintenance) 
Revenue from Recurring License Fee (typically in respect of a term license granted) is recognised on delivery and 
passing of full control of the software to the customer. In order to achieve this, anticipated license fees from future 
recurring invoicing are typically ‘unbundled’ from the Support & Maintenance element and accrued until the invoicing 
occurs. 

Revenue  from  Support  &  Maintenance  is  recognised  over  the  course  of  the  service  provision  in  line  with  agreed 
delivery milestones as control of the environment is progressively transferred to the customer. 

Recurring: Non-Recurring: Software (Initial Licence Fee (ILF)) 
Revenue from Initial License Fees (whether in respect of a perpetual or term license granted) is recognised on delivery 
and passing of full control of the software to the customer.  

For license fees (ILFs and RLFs) where the customer’s control of our software is dependent on associated services 
such as non-recurring services which may be essential for the customer to use the software, the revenue from software 
license  fees  will  be  recognised  over  the  course  of  the  service  provision  in  line  with  agreed  delivery  milestones  as 
control of the whole solution is progressively transferred to the customer. 

Contract revenue, receivables and liabilities 
Long-term contracts for software solutions often contain multiple elements such as software, support, services, hosting 
and/or managed services. 

Where there is a need to unbundle a software solution into its constituent elements, software industry benchmarks are 
applied. 

Recognition of revenue on the software and services elements of longer-term contracts will be driven by new IFRS 15 
treatment whereby revenue is recognised in line with agreed delivery milestones as control passes to the customer. 
The remaining elements will be considered distinct performance obligations with revenue recognised over the course 
of the contract. 

65 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED 

Contract revenue, receivables and liabilities (continued) 
Contract receivables are recognised when performance obligations are discharged under a contractual arrangement 
to the customer but have not been invoiced. Once the invoicing does occur a trade receivable is recognised, and the 
contract receivable is derecognised.   

Contract liabilities arise when invoicing occurs in advance of performance obligations being discharged. The revenue 
associated with the invoicing is deferred until such time as the performance obligation is delivered. 

Segmental reporting 
Operating segments are reported in a manner consistent with the internal reporting provided to the chief operating 
decision-makers. The chief operating decision-makers have  been identified as the Chief Executive Officer and the 
Chief Financial Officer. 

Discontinued operations and held for sale 
Assets (or disposal groups) that are classified as held for sale in accordance with IFRS 5 Non-current Assets Held for 
Sale and Discontinued Operations are measured in accordance with that Standard. 

Non-current assets and disposal groups are classified as held for sale if their carrying amount will be recovered through 
a sale transaction rather than through continuing use. This condition is regarded as met only when the sale is highly 
probable and the asset (or disposal group) is available for immediate sale in its present condition. 

Subsidiary Audit Exemption 
Idox  Software  Limited  (02933889),  Idox  Trustees  Limited  (04111557),  McLaren  Software  Limited  (SC213218)  and 
Tascomi Limited (NI057879) are exempt from the provisions of Companies Act 2006 relating to the audit of individual 
accounts by virtue of section 479A. 

Goodwill 
Goodwill is stated after separate recognition of identifiable intangible assets. It is calculated as the excess of the sum 
of a) fair value of consideration transferred, b) the recognised amount of any non-controlling interest in the acquiree 
and c) acquisition-date fair value of any existing equity interest in the acquiree, over the acquisition-date fair values of 
identifiable net assets. If the fair values of the identifiable net assets exceed the sum calculated above, the excess 
amount (i.e. gain on a bargain purchase) is recognised in profit or loss immediately. 

Cash-generating units to which goodwill has been allocated are tested for impairment biannually. All other individual 
assets or cash-generating units are tested for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that 
the carrying amount may not be recoverable. 

Goodwill is carried at cost less accumulated impairment losses. Unallocated goodwill on acquisitions relates mainly to 
workforce valuation, synergies and economies of scale obtained on combining acquisitions with existing operations. 

Goodwill written off to reserves prior to the date of transition to IFRS remains in reserves. There is no re-instatement 
of goodwill that was amortised prior to transition to IFRS. Goodwill previously written off to reserves is not written back 
to profit or loss on subsequent disposal. 

Other intangible assets 
Intangible assets with a finite useful life are amortised to the consolidated statement of comprehensive income on a 
straight-line basis over their estimated useful lives, which are reviewed on an annual basis. Amortisation commences 
when the asset is available for use. The residual values of intangible assets are assumed to be zero. 

(i) Research and development 
Expenditure on research (or the research phase of an internal project) is recognised in profit or loss in the period in 
which it is incurred. Development costs incurred are capitalised when all the following conditions are satisfied: 

 
 
 
 

 

 

completion of the intangible asset is technically feasible so that it will be available for use or sale; 
the Group intends to complete the intangible asset and use or sell it; 
the Group has the ability to use or sell the intangible asset; 
the intangible asset will generate probable future economic benefits. Among other things, this requires 
that there is a market for the output from the intangible asset or for the intangible asset itself, or, if it is to 
be used internally, the asset will be used in generating such benefits; 
there are adequate technical, financial and other resources to complete the development and to use or sell 
the intangible asset, and 
the expenditure attributable to the intangible asset during its development can be measured reliably. 

66 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED) 

(i) Research and development (continued) 
Development costs not meeting the criteria for capitalisation are expensed in profit or loss as incurred. The cost of an 
internally  generated  intangible  asset  comprises  all  directly  attributable  costs  necessary  to  create,  produce,  and 
prepare the asset to be capable of operating in the manner intended by management. Amortisation commences upon 
completion of the asset. 

Careful judgement by the Directors is applied when deciding whether the recognition requirements for development 
costs have been met. This is necessary as the economic success of any product development is uncertain and may 
be subject to future technical problems at the time of recognition. Judgements are based on the information available 
at each balance sheet date. In addition, all internal activities related to the research and development of new software 
products are continuously monitored by the Directors. 

Amortisation is calculated using the straight-line method over a period of up to 5 years. 

(ii) Customer relationships 
Customer relationships represent the purchase price of customer lists and contractual relationships purchased on the 
acquisition of subsidiaries. These relationships are carried at cost less accumulated amortisation and accumulated 
impairment losses. Amortisation is calculated using the straight-line method over a period of 20, 10 or 5 years.  

(iii) Trade names 
Trade names represent the named intangible asset recognised on the acquisition of these trade names are carried at 
cost less accumulated amortisation and accumulated impairment losses. Amortisation is calculated using the straight-
line method over a period of between 5 and 20 years.  

(iv) Software 
Software represents the purchase price of developed products either acquired as part of the acquisition of subsidiaries 
or procured directly from a vendor. The software is carried at cost less accumulated amortisation and accumulated 
impairment losses. Amortisation is calculated using the straight-line method over a period of between 3 and 10 years.  

(v) Database 
Database represents the grant information database purchased on the acquisition of subsidiaries. Database is carried 
at  cost  less  accumulated  amortisation  and  accumulated  impairment  losses.  Amortisation  is  calculated  using  the 
straight-line method over a period of 5 years. 

(vi) Order backlog 
Order  backlog  includes  the  managed  service  contracts  and  subscription  deferred  revenue  purchased  on  the 
acquisition  of  subsidiaries.  Amortisation  on  the  managed  service  deferred  revenue  is  calculated  based  on  the 
weighting  and  length  of  each  contract  purchased.  Amortisation  on  the  subscription  deferred  revenue  is  calculated 
using the straight-line method over a period up to 5 years. 

Impairment 
For the purposes of assessing impairment, assets are grouped at the lowest levels for which there are separately 
identifiable cash inflows (cash-generating units). As a result, some assets are tested individually for impairment and 
some are tested at cash-generating unit level.  

Goodwill is allocated to those cash-generating unit groupings that are expected to benefit from synergies of the related 
business combination and represent the lowest level within the Group at which management monitors the related cash 
flows. 

Goodwill,  other  individual  assets  or  cash-generating  units  that  include  goodwill,  other  intangible  assets  with  an 
indefinite useful life, and those intangible assets not yet available for use are tested for impairment at least annually.  

All  other  individual  assets  or  cash-generating  units  are  tested  for  impairment  whenever  events  or  changes  in 
circumstances indicate that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. 

An  impairment  loss  is  recognised  for  the  amount  by  which  the  asset's  or  cash-generating  unit's  carrying  amount 
exceeds its recoverable amount. The recoverable amount is the higher of fair value, reflecting market conditions less 
costs to sell, and value-in-use based on an internal discounted cash flow evaluation. Impairment losses recognised 
for cash-generating units, to which goodwill has been allocated, are credited initially to the carrying amount of goodwill.  

Any remaining impairment loss is charged pro rata to the other assets in the cash-generating unit. With the exception 
of goodwill, all assets are subsequently reassessed for indications that an impairment loss previously recognised may 
no longer exist. 

67 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED) 

Property, plant and equipment 
Items of property, plant and equipment are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation. 

Depreciation is charged to the statement of comprehensive income using the following rates and bases so as to write 
off the cost or valuation of items of property, plant and equipment over their expected useful lives. The rates that are 
generally applicable are: 

  Computer hardware 
 
 

Fixtures, fittings and equipment 
Library books and journals 

25% and 50% straight line 
25% straight line 
33 1/3% and 100% straight line 

Useful economic lives and residual values are reviewed annually. 

Employee benefits 
Defined contribution pension plans 
Contributions paid to pension plans of employees are charged to the statement of comprehensive income in the period 
in which they become payable. 

Share-based payment transactions 
All  goods  and  services  received  in  exchange  for  the  grant  of  any  share-based  payment  are  measured  at  their  fair 
values.  Where  employees  are  rewarded  using  share-based  payments,  the  fair  values  of  employees'  services  are 
determined indirectly by reference to the fair value of the instrument granted to the employee.   

This fair value is appraised at the grant date and excludes the impact of non-market vesting conditions (for example, 
profitability and sales growth targets). 

All equity-settled share-based payments are ultimately recognised as an expense in the profit and loss account with 
a corresponding credit to the share option reserve. 

If vesting periods or other non-market vesting conditions apply, the expense is allocated over the vesting period, based 
on the best available estimate of the number of share options expected to vest. Estimates are revised subsequently if 
there  is  any  indication  that  the  number  of  share  options  expected  to  vest  differs  from  previous  estimates.  Any 
cumulative adjustment prior to vesting is recognised in  the current period. No adjustment is made to any expense 
recognised in prior periods if share options that have vested are not exercised. 

Upon exercise of share options, the proceeds received net of attributable transaction costs are credited to reserves.  

Reserves 
Equity comprises the following: 

 

 

 

 

 

 
 

 

 

"Share premium" represents the excess over nominal value of the fair value of consideration received for 
equity shares, net of expenses of the share issue. 
“Capital  redemption  reserve”  represents  when  the  entire  deferred  ordinary  share  capital  was  bought  in 
exchange for one ordinary 1p share.  
“Other reserves” arose as a result of: 

o 

 a  Group  reconstruction  that  occurred  on  17  November  2000.  This  represents  the  issued  share 
capital and share premium account in the Company’s subsidiary undertaking, Idox Software Limited; 
and 

o  Share premium arising on consideration shares issued on the acquisition of 6PM Holdings plc and 

Halarose Holdings Limited. 

“Share options reserve” represents shares to be issued on potential exercise of those share options that have 
been accounted for under “IFRS 2 Share Based Payments”. 
“ESOP trust” represents share capital purchased to satisfy the obligation  of the employee share scheme. 
Purchased  shares  are  classified  within  the  ESOP  trust  reserve  and  the  cost  of  shares  purchased  are 
presented as a deduction from total equity. 
“Retained earnings” represents retained profits / (losses). 
“Treasury  reserve”  represents  shares  repurchased  by  the  Company  to  be  held  for  redistribution  as  share 
options. The cost of treasury shares is debited to the Treasury reserve. 
“Foreign  currency  translation  reserve”  represents  exchange  gains  and  losses  on  translation  of  foreign 
operations.  
“Non-controlling interest” represents retained profits attributable to Non-controlling interests.  

68 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED) 

Taxation 
Tax on the profit or loss for the year comprises current and deferred tax. Current tax is charged to profit or loss except 
where it relates to tax on items recognised in other comprehensive income or directly in equity, in which case it is 
charged to equity or other comprehensive income. 

Current tax is the tax currently payable based on taxable profit for the year.   

Deferred income taxes are calculated using the liability method on temporary differences. Deferred tax is generally 
provided  on  the  difference  between  the  carrying  amounts  of  assets  and  liabilities  and  their  tax  bases.  However, 
deferred tax is not provided on the initial recognition of goodwill, nor on the initial recognition of an asset or liability 
unless the related transaction is a business combination or affects tax or accounting profit. Deferred tax on temporary 
differences associated with shares in subsidiaries is not provided if reversal of these temporary differences can be 
controlled by the Group and it is probable that reversal will not occur in the foreseeable future.   

In addition, tax losses available to be carried forward as well as other income credits to the Group are assessed 
for recognition as deferred tax assets. 

Deferred tax liabilities are provided in full, with no discounting. Deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it 
is probable that the underlying deductible temporary differences will be able to be offset against future taxable income. 
Current and deferred tax assets and liabilities are calculated at tax rates that are expected to apply to their respective 
period of realisation, provided they are enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date. 

Changes in deferred tax assets or liabilities are recognised as a component of tax expense in profit or loss, except 
where they relate to items that are charged or credited directly to other comprehensive income or equity in which case 
the related deferred tax is also charged or credited directly to other comprehensive income or equity. 

Research and development tax credits 
The UK tax regime permits additional tax relief for qualifying expenditure incurred on research and development. The 
Research and Development Expenditure Credit (RDEC) Scheme has been adopted, which permits a tax credit of 11% 
of  qualifying  expenditure  for  companies  classified  as  large.  The  Idox  Group  is  considered  large  for  research  and 
development tax credit purposes owing to a headcount of over 500. 

Operating leases  
Leases where the lessor retains substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership are classified as operating leases. 
All  leases  held  by  the  Group  are  operating  in  nature.  Amounts  paid  under  operating  leases  are  charged  to  the 
statement of comprehensive income on a straight-line basis over the lease term. 

Dividend distributions 
Interim dividends in respect of equity shares are recognised in the financial statements in the period in which they are 
paid. 

Final dividends in respect of equity shares are recognised in the financial statements in the period that the dividends 
are formally approved. 

Foreign currency translation 
The functional and presentation currency of Idox plc and its United Kingdom subsidiaries is the pound sterling (£). 
Transactions  in  foreign  currencies  are  initially  recorded  at  the  functional  currency  rate  ruling  at  the  date  of  the 
transaction. Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are translated at the functional currency 
rate of exchange ruling at the balance sheet date. All differences are taken to profit or loss. 

In the consolidated financial statements, the assets and liabilities of non-sterling functional currency subsidiaries, are 
translated  into  pound  sterling  at  the  rate  of  exchange  ruling  at  the  balance  sheet  date.  The  results  of  non-sterling 
functional currency subsidiaries are translated into pound sterling using average rates of exchange.  

Exchange  adjustments  arising  are  taken  to  the  foreign  currency  translation  reserve  and  reported  in  other 
comprehensive income. There is no tax impact on these adjustments. 

69 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

1 ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED) 

Financial instruments 
Financial assets and financial liabilities are recognised on the Group’s balance sheet when the Group has become a 
party to the contractual provisions of the instrument. 

The Group has a hold-to-collect business model in respect of financial assets held at amortised cost. The objective of 
the ‘hold to collect’ business model is, in most cases, to hold financial assets to collect their contractual cash flows, 
rather than with a view to selling the assets to generate cash flows.  

Financial assets 
Financial assets are classified according to the substance of the contractual arrangements entered into.   

Trade and other receivables 
The entity always recognises lifetime expected credit losses (ECL) for trade receivables, and contract assets, and 
ECL are estimated using a provision matrix based on the Group’s historical credit loss experience. 

Trade receivables do not carry any interest and are initially stated at their fair value, as reduced by appropriate credit 
losses for estimated irrecoverable amounts.  

Cash and cash equivalents 
Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash on hand and on deposit with a maturity of 3 months or less from inception 
and are subject to an insignificant risk of changes in value.   

Financial liabilities and equity 
Financial liabilities and equity instruments are classified according to the substance of the contractual arrangements 
entered into. An equity instrument is any contract that evidences a residual interest in the assets of the Group after 
deducting all of its financial liabilities. 

Bank borrowings 
Interest-bearing  bank  loans  and  overdrafts  are  recorded  initially  at  fair  value,  net  of  direct  transaction  costs.  Such 
instruments  are  subsequently  carried  at  their  amortised  cost  and  finance  charges,  including  premiums  payable  on 
settlement or redemption, are recognised in profit or loss over the term of the instrument using an effective rate of 
interest. 

Bonds in issue 
Bonds in issue are recorded initially at fair value, net of direct transaction costs. The bonds are subsequently carried 
at their amortised cost and finance charges are recognised in profit or loss over the term of the instrument using an 
effective rate of interest.  

Trade and other payables 
Trade and  other payables are not interest-bearing, these  are initially stated at  their fair  value and subsequently  at 
amortised cost. 

Equity instruments 
Equity instruments issued by the Company are recorded at the proceeds received, net of direct issue costs. 

70 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

2 SEGMENTAL ANALYSIS 

As at 31 October 2019, the Group was organised into three operating segments, which are detailed below.  

Financial information is reported to the chief operating decision maker, which comprises the Chief Executive Officer 
and the Chief Financial Officer, monthly on a business unit basis with revenue and operating profits split by business 
unit. Each business unit is deemed an operating segment as each offers different products and services. 

  Public Sector Software (PSS) – delivering specialist information management solutions and services to the 

public sector. 

  Engineering  Information  Management  (EIM)  –  delivering  engineering  document  management  and  control 

solutions to asset intensive industry sectors. 

  Content  (CONT)  –  delivering  funding  and  compliance  solutions  to  corporate,  public  and  commercial 

customers. 

Health is now included in PSS as it shares resources within PSS and is no longer separately identifiable. 

On 2nd November 2018 the Digital segment was sold. As Digital was a separately identifiable division the results for 
the period ended 31 October 2019 and comparative period have been classified as a discontinued operation.  

Segment revenue comprises sales to external customers and excludes gains arising on the disposal of assets and 
finance  income.  Segment  profit  reported  to  the  Board  represents  the  profit  earned  by  each  segment  before  the 
allocation of taxation, Group interest payments and Group acquisition costs. The assets and liabilities of the Group 
are not reviewed by the chief operating decision maker on a segment basis. The Group does not place reliance on 
any specific customer and has no individual customer that generates 10% or more of its total Group revenue. 

The segment revenues by geographic location are as follows: 

2019 
Revenues from external customers 
United Kingdom 
USA 
Europe 
Australia 
Rest of World 

2018 
Revenues from external customers 
United Kingdom 
USA 
Europe 
Australia 
Rest of World 

  Continuing  
2019 
£000 

Discontinued 
2019 
£000 

Total Group 
2019 
£000 

43,416 
5,448 
14,948 
315 
1,365 
65,492 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

43,416 
5,448 
14,948 
315 
1,365 
65,492 

Restated 
Continuing 
  2018 
£000 

Discontinued 
2018 
£000 

Total Group 
Restated 
2018 
£000 

45,584 
4,921 
15,070 
475 
364 
66,414 

5,995 
- 
205 
- 
21 
6,221 

51,579 
4,921 
15,275 
475 
385 
72,635 

Revenues are attributed to individual countries on the basis of the location of the customer.   

71 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

2 SEGMENTAL ANALYSIS (CONTINUED) 

The segment revenues by type are as follows: 

2019 
Revenues by type 
Recurring revenues – PSS 
Recurring revenues – EIM 
Recurring revenues – Content 
Recurring revenues 

Non-recurring revenues – PSS 
Non-recurring revenues – EIM 
Non-recurring revenues – Content 
Non-recurring revenues 

Revenue from sale of goods 
Revenue from rendering of services 

2018 
Revenues by type 
Recurring revenues – PSS 
Recurring revenues – EIM 
Recurring revenues – Content 
Recurring revenues – Digital 
Recurring revenues 

Non-recurring revenues – PSS 
Non-recurring revenues – EIM 
Non-recurring revenues – Content 
Non-recurring revenues – Digital 
Non-recurring revenues 

Revenue from sale of goods 
Revenue from rendering of services 

  Continuing 
2019 
£000 

Discontinued 
2019 
£000 

Total Group 
2019 
 £000 

24,144 
7,100 
4,492 
35,736 

17,498 
2,070 
10,188 
29,756 

65,492 

23,247 
42,245 
65,492 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
- 
- 

24,144 
7,100 
4,492 
35,736 

17,498 
2,070 
10,188 
29,756 

65,492 

23,247 
42,245 
65,492 

Restated 
Continuing 
2018 
£000 

Discontinued 
2018 
£000 

Group Restated 
2018 
 £000 

19,239 
7,285 
4,059 
- 
30,583 

23,300 
2,718 
9,813 
- 
35,831 

66,414 

17,335 
49,079 
66,414 

- 
- 
- 
3,276 
3,276 

- 
- 
- 
2,945 
2,945 

6,221 

61 
6,160 
6,221 

19,239 
7,285 
4,059 
3,276 
33,859 

23,300 
2,718 
9,813 
2,945 
38,776 

72,635 

17,396 
55,239 
72,635 

Recurring revenue is income generated from customers on an annual contractual basis. Recurring revenue amounts 
to approximately 55% (2018: 46%) of continuing revenue, which is revenue generated annually from sales to existing 
customers. 

All revenues are recognised over the period of the contract, unless our only performance obligation is to license or re-
license  a  customer’s  existing  user  without  any  further  obligations,  in  which  case  the  revenue  is  recognised  upon 
completion of the obligation. 

All contracts are issued with commercial payment terms without any unusual financial or deferred arrangements and 
do not include any amounts of variable consideration that are constrained. 

The  Group’s  total  outstanding  contracted  performance  obligations  at  31  October  2019  was  £56,410,000  and  it  is 
anticipated that 73% of this will be recognised as revenue in FY20. 

72 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

2 SEGMENTAL ANALYSIS (CONTINUED) 

IFRS 15 adoption 
The  following  table  sets  out  the  impact  the  opening  IFRS  15  adjustment  has  on  FY19  and  future  periods,  as  at  1 
November 2018 when it was recorded: 

IFRS 15 adoption opening adjustment (gross of deferred tax) 

11,532 

12 months to 
31 October 2019 
£000 

Anticipated realisation: 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

FY19 
FY20 
FY21 
FY22 
FY23 - FY25 

6,026 
2,820 
1,685 
757 
244 

11,532 

The following table sets out the Group’s estimation of the financial reporting of FY19 had IFRS 15 not been adopted: 

 Revenue  

 Cost of sales  

 Administrative expenses  

 Net finance cost  

 Income tax charge 

 IFRS 15  

 IAS 18  

 £000  

 £000  

   65,492  

   59,116  

(19,481)  

(19,481)  

(44,334)  

(44,334)  

  (1,702)  

  (1,500)  

  (1,192)  

       (19)  

 Loss for the year from continuing operations  

 (1,217)  

  (6,218)  

 Net Assets  

   44,611  

   39,610  

Whilst the IAS 18 estimation of FY19 presents lower revenues and a larger retained loss from continuing activities, it 
is important to note following the introduction of a new Board and Management team, the Group’s approach to revenue 
recognition in FY19 is more cautious than in prior periods irrespective of the distinctions between IAS 18 and IFRS 
15.  

The changes in the way the revenue is recorded in FY19 and future periods as a result of the adoption of IFRS 15, 
better reflect the Group’s delivery of performance obligations with its customers. 

73 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

2 SEGMENTAL ANALYSIS (CONTINUED) 

The segment results by business unit for the year ended 31 October 2019: 

Revenue 

Earnings before depreciation, amortisation, restructuring, 
acquisition costs, impairment, financing costs and share option 
costs 

Depreciation 
Amortisation – software licences, customer lists, order backlog 
and R&D 
Amortisation – acquired intangibles 
Restructuring costs 
Acquisition costs 
Share option costs 

Adjusted segment operating profit 

Financing costs 

Loss from the sale of discontinued operations 

Finance income 

Finance costs 

Loss before taxation 

PSS 
£000 
41,642 

EIM 
£000 
9,170 

CONTENT 
£000 
14,680 

Continuing  
Operations 
Total 
£000 
65,492 

Discontinued  
Operations 
Digital 
£000 
- 

11,052 

(720) 

(2,991) 
(3,270) 
(1,613) 
(174) 
(850) 

1,410 

(93) 

(772) 
(440) 
(30) 
- 
- 

1,434 

75 

1,899 

(26) 

(340) 
(476) 
(512) 
- 
(9) 

536 

14,361 

(839) 

(4,103) 
(4,186) 
(2,155) 
(174) 
(859) 

2,045 

(368) 

- 

172 

(1,874) 

(25) 

- 

- 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 

(602) 

- 

- 

(602) 

The corporate recharge to the business unit EBITDA is allocated on a head count basis in FY19, compared to a revenue basis in FY18.  

Total 
£000 
65,492 

14,361 

(839) 

(4,103) 
(4,186) 
(2,155) 
(174) 
(859) 

2,045 

(368) 

(602) 

172 

(1,874) 

(627) 

74 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

2 SEGMENTAL ANALYSIS (CONTINUED) 

The restated segment results by business unit for the year ended 31 October 2018: 

Revenue 

Earnings before depreciation, amortisation, 
restructuring, acquisition costs, impairment, financing 
costs and share option costs 

Depreciation 
Amortisation – software licences, order backlog and 
R&D 
Amortisation – acquired intangibles 
Restructuring costs 

Acquisition costs 
Impairment 
Share option costs 

PSS 
£000 
33,285 

EIM 
£000 
10,003 

CONTENT 
£000 
13,604 

DIGITAL* 
£000 
268 

HEALTH 
£000 
9,254 

Continuing 
Operations 
Total 
£000 
66,414 

Discontinued 
Operations 
Digital 
£000 
6,221 

8,939 

(779) 

(2,355) 
(2,052) 
(104) 

850 
(6,079) 
(46) 

1,361 

(196) 

(651) 
(468) 
(239) 

- 
(1,800) 
- 

2,295 

(14) 

(176) 
(493) 
(38) 

6 
- 
(4) 

(486) 

- 

- 
- 
(8) 

- 
- 
- 

1,530 

(117) 

(536) 
(1,482) 
(47) 

- 
(25,376) 
- 

13,639 

(1,106) 

(3,718) 
(4,495) 
(436) 

856 
(33,255) 
(50) 

(2,834) 

(38) 

(28) 
(374) 
(194) 

- 
(6,275) 
- 

Total 
£000 
72,635 

10,805 

(1,144) 

(3,746) 
(4,869) 
(630) 

856 
(39,530) 
(50) 

Adjusted segment operating (loss) / profit 

(1,626) 

(1,993) 

1,576 

(494) 

(26,028) 

(28,565) 

(9,743) 

(38,308) 

Financing costs 

Finance income 

Finance costs 

Loss before taxation 

(336) 

449 

(1,788) 

- 

- 

- 

(336) 

449 

(1,788) 

(30,240) 

(9,743) 

(39,983) 

*Results for the Knowledge Exchange for the period to 30th April 2018. On the 1st May 2018 following an internal reorganisation the Knowledge Exchange sub division was transferred to the Content 
segment. Results also include the corporate recharge for the Digital segment which remain as continuing as the cost are not clearly identifiable as costs of the segment.

75 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

3 OPERATING PROFIT / (LOSS) FOR THE YEAR 

Operating profit / (loss) for the year has been arrived at after charging: 

Auditor’s remuneration: 

Fees payable to the Company Auditor for the audit of the parent company and 
consolidated annual accounts 
The audit of the Company’s subsidiaries, pursuant to legislation 
Audit related services  
Non-audit services  

Tax services – compliance 
Tax services – advisory 

Operating lease rentals – buildings & equipment 
Depreciation – owned * 
Amortisation: 

Software licences 
Research & development 
Backlog Orders 
Customer Contracts 
Acquired intangibles ** 

Equity-settled share-based payments 

2019 
£000 

18 
332 
- 
75 
425 

36 
76 
1,564 
839 

743 
3,172 
29 
160 
4,185 
859 

2018 
£000 

10 
265 
67 
119 
461 

42 
63 
2,664 
1,106 

934 
2,784 
84 
- 
4,411 
50 

*Depreciation excludes £Nil (2018: £38,000) in relation to the discontinued Digital division. The total depreciation charge of the year 
including discontinued operations is £839,000 (2018: £1,144,000) as disclosed in note 11. 

**Amortisation  on  acquired  intangibles  excludes  £Nil  (2018:  £402,000)  in  relation  to  the  discontinued  Digital  division.  The  total 
amortisation charge for the year including discontinued operations of £8,289,000 (2018: £4,800,000), as disclosed in note 12. 

Restructuring costs 
Restructuring costs were £2.2m (2018: £0.4m) as the new Management team assessed in detail all operations of the 
Group  in  the  year;  restructuring  business  units  and  Group  processes  to  improve  the  Group’s  current  and  future 
financial performance and prospects. Includes costs relating to redundancies, disposal of property and resolution of 
historic litigation. 

4 DIRECTORS AND EMPLOYEES 

Staff costs during the year were as follows: 

Wages and salaries 
Social security costs 
Pension costs 

Staff costs during the year were as follows: 

Wages and salaries 
Social security costs 
Pension costs 

Continuing 
Operations 
2019 
£000 

  Discontinued 
Operations 
2019 
£000 

27,938 
3,232 
1,324 
32,494 

- 
- 
- 
- 

Continuing 
Operations 
2018 
£000 

  Discontinued 
Operations 
2018 
£000 

30,156 
3,269 
1,282 
34,707 

4,317 
398 
138 
4,853 

Total 
2019 
£000 

27,938 
3,232 
1,324 
32,494 

Total 
2018 
£000 

34,473 
3,667 
1,420 
39,560 

In addition, during the year share based payment charges of £859,000 (2018: £50,000) were incurred.  

During the year, the Group incurred redundancy costs to former employees in respect of continuing operations of 
£285,000 (2018: £436,000) and £Nil (2018: £194,000) in respect of discontinued operations.  

76 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

4 DIRECTORS AND EMPLOYEES (CONTINUED) 

The average number of employees of the Group during the year was 671 (2018: 804) and was made up as follows: 

Office and administration (including Directors of the 
Company and its subsidiary undertakings) 
Sales 
Development 
Operations 

Office and administration (including Directors of the 
Company and its subsidiary undertakings) 
Sales 
Development 
Operations 

Continuing 
Operations 
2019 
No. 

  Discontinued 
Operations 
2019 
No. 

60 
44 
130 
437 
671 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

Continuing 
Operations 
2018 
No. 

  Discontinued 
Operations 
2018 
No. 

55 
56 
133 
477 
721 

2 
3 
12 
66 
83 

Total 
2019 
No. 

60 
44 
130 
437 
671 

Total 
2018 
No. 

57 
59 
145 
543 
804 

The average number of Directors of the Group during the year was 7 (2018: 6). 

Remuneration in respect of Directors was as follows: 

Emoluments 
Pension contributions 
Share option exercise gain 

      2019 
£000 

      2018 
£000 

1,049 
10 
- 
1,059 

880 
13 
629 
1,522 

In  addition  to  the  remuneration  stated  above,  the  Group  incurred  social  security  costs  in  respect  of  Directors  of 
£139,000 (2018: £181,000).  

The amounts set out above include remuneration in respect of the highest paid Director as follows: 

Aggregate emoluments 
Pension contributions 

2019 
£000 

511 
- 
511 

2018 
£000 

202 
1 
203 

During the year the highest paid Director did not exercise share options. In the prior year the highest paid Director 
did not exercise share options. 

During the year, the Group incurred social security costs in respect of the highest paid Director of £78,000 (2018: 
£23,000). 

Details of the remuneration for each Director are included in the Report on Remuneration, which can be found on 
pages 30 to 31 but does not form part of the audited accounts. 

77 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

5 ACQUISITION COSTS 

All acquisition related costs are expensed in the period incurred rather than added to the cost of investment. Acquisition 
costs relating to individual acquisitions are disclosed in note 26.  

Acquisition costs 

Acquisition costs 
Release of contingent consideration 

6 FINANCE INCOME AND COSTS 

Interest receivable  
Dividends receivable 
Foreign exchange differences 
Other income  
Time Value of Money Adjustment on contract receivables greater than 1 year 
Finance income  

Bank interest payable 
Bond interest payable 
Effective interest rate adjustment 
Non-utilisation fees  
Amortisation of employee equity scheme shares 
Amortisation of bank fees 
Foreign exchange differences 
Finance costs  

7 DIVIDENDS 

Final dividend paid in respect of the year ended 31 October 2018  
and 31 October 2017 

Pence per ordinary share 

Interim dividend paid in respect of the year ended 31 October 2019  
and 31 October 2018 

Pence per ordinary share 

2019 
£000 

(174) 
- 
(174) 

2019 
£000 

3 
- 
- 
169 
- 
172 

(850) 
(539) 
(33) 
(85) 
(122) 
(164) 
(81) 
(1,874) 

2019 
£000 

- 

- 

- 

- 

2018 
£000 

(3) 
859 
856 

Restated 
2018 
£000 

2 
18 
22 
191 
216 
449 

(814) 
(618) 
(76) 
(52) 
(106) 
(122) 
- 
(1,788) 

2018 
£000 

2,717 

0.655p 

- 

-  

The Directors have proposed the payment of a final dividend of £Nil per share, which would amount to £Nil (2018: 
£Nil). 

78 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

8 INCOME TAX 

The tax charge is made up as follows: 

Current tax 
UK corporation tax on loss for the year 
Foreign tax on overseas companies 
Over provision in respect of prior periods 
Total current tax 

Deferred tax 
Origination and reversal of temporary differences 
Adjustment for rate change 
Adjustments in respect of prior periods 
Total deferred tax 

Total tax charge / (credit) 

The tax charge is made up as follows: 

Current tax 
UK corporation tax on loss for the year 
Foreign tax on overseas companies 
Over provision in respect of prior periods 
Total current tax 

Deferred tax 
Origination and reversal of temporary differences 
Adjustment for rate change 
Adjustments in respect of prior periods 
Total deferred tax 

Total tax charge / (credit) 

The tax charge is made up as follows: 

Current tax 
UK corporation tax on loss for the year 
Under provision in respect of prior periods 
Total current tax 

Deferred tax 
Origination and reversal of temporary differences 
Adjustment for rate change 
Total deferred tax 

Total tax credit 

2019 
£000 

44 
300 
(195) 
149 

897 
(170) 
316 
1,043 

1,192 

Restated 
2018 
£000 

366 
274 
(1,384) 
(744) 

(3,020) 
407 
1 
(2,612) 

(3,356) 

Continuing 
Operations 
2019 
£000 

Restated 
  Continuing 
Operations 
2018 
£000 

44 
300 
(195) 
149 

897 
(170) 
316 
1,043 

1,192 

366 
274 
(1,395) 
(755) 

(2,289) 
363 
1 
(1,925) 

(2,680) 

Discontinued 
Operations 
2019 
£000 

Discontinued 
Operations 
2018 
£000 

- 
- 
- 

- 
- 
- 

- 

- 
11 
11 

(731) 
44 
(687) 

(676) 

79 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

8 INCOME TAX (CONTINUED) 

The differences between the total tax charge above and the amount calculated by applying the standard rate of UK 
corporation tax to the profit before tax, together with the impact on the effective tax rate, are as follows: 

Loss before taxation on total operations 

  Restated 

% ETR 

2018 

% ETR 

movement 

£000  movement 

(39,983) 

2019 

£000 

(627) 

Loss on ordinary activities multiplied by the standard 

rate of corporation tax in the UK of 19% (2018: 19%) 

(119) 

19.00 

(7,597) 

19.00 

Effects of: 
Share option deduction 

Tax losses utilised in year 

International losses derecognised / (recognised) 
Accelerated capital allowances 

Other timing differences 

Expenses not deductible for tax purposes 

Prior year over-provision 

Non-taxable income 
Adjustment for tax rate differences 
R&D enhanced relief 
Foreign tax suffered 

197 
- 

507 

(6) 

(7) 

386 

193 

25 

(49) 
62 
3 
1,192 

(31.39) 

- 

(52) 
- 

(80.96) 

(1,163) 

0.96 

1.05 

(61.52) 

(30.74) 

(3.93) 

7.76 
(9.89) 
(0.41) 
(190.07) 

(29) 

- 

5,941 

(606) 

(246) 

471 
(77) 
2 
(3,356) 

0.13 
- 

2.91 

0.07 

- 

(14.86) 

1.52 

0.62 

(1.18) 
0.19 
(0.01) 
8.39 

The effective tax rate (ETR) for the period was (190.07%) (2018: 8.39%). The main factors for the lower ETR on the 
net  loss  before  tax  position  were  threefold.  New  share  options  granted  during  the  year,  some  of  which  were  fully-
vested on issue, resulted in a significant disallowable P&L impact. This was the same for costs incurred as part of the 
Digital division disposal and the acquisition of Tascomi.   

Lastly, non-recognition of losses in certain jurisdictions, owing to uncertainty over their future utilisation, decreased 
ETR significantly. The main jurisdiction impact was in France which, alongside non-recognition of current-year losses, 
elected to derecognise losses brought forward from prior years. This downward pressure on ETR was mitigated slightly 
by recognition of previously unrecognised losses in Malta, following taxable profits in some of the subsidiaries based 
there.  

Movement on trading losses during 2019 are as follows: 

Recognised trading losses 

As at 1 November 2018  
Impact of deferred tax recognition at local rate 
Recognised / (derecognised) during the year 
Utilised during the year 
Adjustment for foreign exchange movements 

Unrecognised trading losses 

Losses not recognised 

UK 
unrelieved 
trading 
losses 
£000 

Foreign 
unrelieved 
trading 
losses 
£000 

Total 
unrelieved 
trading 
losses 
£000 

- 
- 
1,729 
- 
- 
1,729 

1,186 
50 
(593) 
(238) 
(26) 
379 

1,186 
50 
1,136 
(238) 
(26) 
2,108 

Tax effect  
£000 

347 
11 
79 
(50) 
(5) 
382 

(1,698) 
(1,698) 

(9,925) 
(9,925) 

(11,623) 
(11,623) 

(3,394) 
(3,394) 

80 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

8 INCOME TAX (CONTINUED) 

For comparative purposes, movement on trading losses during 2018 were as follows: 

Recognised trading losses 

As at 1 November 2017 Restated 
Impact of deferred tax recognition at local rate 
Recognised during the year 
Utilised during the year 

Unrecognised trading losses 

Losses not recognised 

UK 
unrelieved 
trading 
losses 
£000 

Foreign 
unrelieved 
trading 
losses 
£000 

Total 
unrelieved 
trading 
losses 
£000 

Tax effect  
£000 

327 
- 
- 
(327) 
- 

819 
- 
1,858 
(1,491) 
1,186 

1,146 
- 
1,858 
(1,818) 
1,186 

338 
(107) 
467 
(351) 
347 

(1,698) 
(1,698) 

(8,693) 
(8,693) 

(10,391) 
(10,391) 

(2,978) 
(2,978) 

The UK trading losses remaining unrecognised at the end of the year relate to brought-forward losses in respect 
of loss-making trades. The foreign losses derecognised during the year were in France as they are not expected 
to be utilised in future. The foreign losses recognised during the year were in Netherlands and are expected to be 
utilised in the future. The foreign losses utilised during the year were in the US. The closing unrecognised losses 
of £11,623,000 relate to Malta, the UK, France and Germany. The decision was made to maintain derecognition 
of these assets until there is more certainty over their future utilisation. Across the year the total deferred tax asset 
in respect of unrelieved trading losses increased from £347,000 to £382,000. There is no expiry dates for any of 
the unrelieved trading losses carried forward. 

9 DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS 

On 12 September 2018 the Group resolved to seek to dispose of the Digital division which carried out the Groups 
digital consultancy operations. The disposal was effected in order to limit the Group’s exposure to future losses 
and liabilities and improve the working capital position. The disposal was completed on 2nd November 2018, on 
which date control of the Digital division was passed to the acquirer. 

The  results  of  the  discontinued  operations,  which  have  been  excluded  in  the  consolidated  statement  of 
comprehensive income, were as follows: 

Revenue 
Expenses 
Loss on Disposal 

Loss before tax 

Attributable tax credit 

Net loss attributable to discontinued operations 

2019 
£000 

- 
- 
(602) 

2018 
£000 

6,221 
(15,964) 
- 

(602) 

(9,743) 

- 

676 

(602) 

(9,067) 

During the year, Digital contributed £Nil (2018: (£1,856k)) to the Group’s net operating cash flows, paid £Nil (2018: 
£Nil)  in  respect  of  investing  and  financing  activities.  Expenses  for  discontinued  operations  in  FY19  relate  to 
disposal costs. 

For the year ending 31 October 2018 the Digital operations were classified as a disposal group held for sale and 
presented separately on the balance sheet. Non-current assets were fully impaired at April 2018 with an impairment 
loss of £6.3m recognised. No further impairment loss was recognised on the classification of these operations held 
for sale. 

81 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

9 DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS (CONTINUED) 

The major classes of assets and liabilities comprising the operations classified as held for sale are as follows: 

Trade and other receivables 

Total assets classified as held for sale 

Trade and other payables 
Other liabilities 

Total liabilities associated with assets classified as held for sale 

Net assets of disposal group 

10 EARNINGS PER SHARE 

2019 
£000 

- 

- 

- 
- 

- 

- 

2018 
£000 

1,114 

1,114 

384 
579 

963 

151 

The earnings per ordinary share is calculated by reference to the earnings attributable to ordinary shareholders divided 
by the weighted average number of shares in issue during each period, as follows: 

Continuing Operations 

Loss for the year 

Basic earnings per share 
Weighted average number of shares in issue 

Basic earnings per share 

Weighted average number of shares in issue 
Add back: 
Treasury shares 
ESOP shares 
Weighted average allotted, called up and fully paid share capital 

Diluted earnings per share 

Diluted earnings per share 

2019 
£000 

Restated 
2018 
£000 

(1,104) 

(27,554) 

420,788,528 

413,116,107 

(0.26)p 

(6.67)p 

420,788,528 

413,116,107 

1,491,219 
1,316,142 
423,595,889 

1,491,219 
1,214,256 
415,821,582 

(0.26)p 

(6.67)p 

Diluted earnings per share cannot further dilute the loss attributable to the owners, therefore, diluted earnings 
per share during a loss making period is the same as basic earnings per share. 

82 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

10 EARNINGS PER SHARE (CONTINUED) 

Adjusted earnings per share 

Loss for the year 
Add back: 
Amortisation on acquired intangibles 
Impairment 
Acquisition costs 
Restructuring costs 
Financing costs 
Share option costs 
Tax effect 
Adjusted profit for year 

2019 
£000 

Restated 
2018  
£000 

(1,104) 

(27,554) 

4,215 
- 
174 
2,155 
368 
859 
(1,210) 
5,457 

4,495 
33,255 
(856) 
435 
336 
50 
(937) 
9,224 

Weighted average number of shares in issue - basic 
Weighted average number of shares in issue - diluted 

420,788,528 
424,320,396 

413,116,107 
416,729,859 

Adjusted earnings per share 

Adjusted diluted earnings per share 

1.30p 

1.29p 

2.23p 

2.21p 

Alternative Performance Measures 
In the financial statements presented in FY18 and prior periods, share option costs were not included as an adjusting 
item in the adjusted earnings per share calculation.  

We  have  concluded  share  option  costs  should  be  included  as  an  adjusting  item  to  present  a  comparable  measure 
against our peers. Adjusted earnings per share for FY19 has been presented on this basis and the FY18 comparatives 
have also been updated given the prior period restatements. 

Discontinued Operations 

Loss for the year 

Basic earnings per share 
Weighted average number of shares in issue 

Basic earnings per share 

Weighted average number of shares in issue 
Add back: 
Treasury shares 
ESOP shares 
Weighted average allotted, called up and fully paid share capital 

Diluted earnings per share 

Diluted earnings per share 

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000 

(602) 

(9,067) 

420,788,528 

413,116,107 

(0.14)p 

(2.19)p 

420,788,528 

413,116,107 

1,491,219 
1,316,142 
423,595,889 

1,491,219 
1,214,256 
415,821,582 

(0.14)p 

(2.19)p 

83 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

10 EARNINGS PER SHARE (CONTINUED) 

Total Operations 

Loss for the year 

Basic earnings per share 
Weighted average number of shares in issue 

Basic earnings per share 

Weighted average number of shares in issue 
Add back: 
Treasury shares 
ESOP shares 
Weighted average allotted, called up and fully paid share capital 

Diluted earnings per share 

Diluted earnings per share 

Adjusted earnings per share 

Loss for the year 
Add back: 
Amortisation on acquired intangibles 
Impairment 
Acquisition costs 
Restructuring costs 
Financing costs 
Share option costs 
Tax effect 
Adjusted profit for year 

2019 
£000 

Restated 
2018 
£000 

(1,706) 

(36,621) 

420,788,528 

413,116,107 

(0.41)p 

(8.86)p 

420,788,528 

413,116,107 

1,491,219 
1,316,142 
423,595,889 

1,491,219 
1,214,256 
415,821,582 

(0.41)p 

(8.86)p 

2019 
£000 

Restated 
2018  
£000 

(1,706) 

(36,621) 

4,215 
- 
174 
2,155 
368 
859 
(1,210) 
4,855 

4,897 
39,530 
(856) 
630 
336 
50 
(1,050) 
6,916 

Weighted average number of shares in issue - basic 
Weighted average number of shares in issue - diluted 

420,788,528 
424,320,396 

413,116,107 
416,729,859 

Adjusted earnings per share 

Adjusted diluted earnings per share 

1.15p 

1.14p 

1.67p 

1.66p 

84 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

11 PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT  

Computer 
hardware 
£000 

Fixtures, 
fittings and 
equipment 
£000 

Library 
books and 
journals 
£000 

Cost  
At 1 November 2017 
Foreign exchange 
Additions 
Additions on acquisition 
Disposals 
Internal reallocation of asset category 
At 31 October 2018 
Foreign exchange 
Additions 
Additions on acquisition 
Disposals 
At 31 October 2019 

Depreciation 
At 1 November 2017 
Foreign exchange 
Provided in the year 
Eliminated on disposal 
Internal reallocation of asset category 
At 31 October 2018 
Foreign exchange 
Provided in the year 
Disposals 
At 31 October 2019 

Net book amount at 31 October 2019 

Net book amount at 31 October 2018 

3,410 
120 
595 
1 
(1,094) 
6 
3,038 
(16) 
674 
35 
- 
3,731 

1,953 
51 
994 
(1,012) 
5 
1,991 
6 
754 
- 
2,751 

980 

1,047 

2,038 
97 
10 
- 
(858) 
(6) 
1,281 
76 
73 
15 
(39) 
1,406 

1,758 
78 
146 
(858) 
(5) 
1,119 
72 
80 
(39) 
1,232 

174 

162 

17 
(1) 
1 
- 
(6) 
- 
11 
- 
11 
- 
- 
22 

11 
- 
4 
(6) 
- 
9 
- 
5 
- 
14 

8 

2 

Total 
£000 

5,465 
216 
606 
1 
(1,958) 
- 
4,330 
60 
758 
50 
(39) 
5,159 

3,722 
129 
1,144 
(1,876) 
- 
3,119 
78 
839 
(39) 
3,997 

1,162 

1,211 

The Group has pledged the above assets to secure banking facilities granted to the Group. 

85 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

12 INTANGIBLE ASSETS  

Customer 
relation- 
ships 
£000 

Goodwill 
£000 

77,263 
- 
- 
240 
- 
- 
- 
- 
61 
77,564 
- 
8 
2,269 
- 
79,841 

3,878 
- 
- 
- 
27,831 
- 
31,709 
- 
- 
31,709 

30,807 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
30,807 
- 
- 
1,151 
- 
31,958 

9,814 
- 
1,909 
- 
5,754 
- 
17,477 
2 
1,663 
19,142 

Trade 
names 
£000 

12,593 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
12,593 
- 
- 
- 
- 
12,593 

4,292 
- 
859 
- 
2,717 
- 
7,868 
- 
697 
8,565 

Develop
-ment 
costs 
£000 

Software 
£000 

Order 
backlog 
£000 

Customer 
lists 
£000 

Total 
£000 

16,002 
1 
222 
14 
14 
- 
(189) 
(14) 
(12) 
16,038 
- 
2,206 
4,448 
(5) 
22,687 

5,217 
- 
2,979 
5 
2,041 
(189) 
10,053 
- 
2,512 
12,565 

12,671 
17 
3,646 
- 
- 
(1,694) 
(524) 
- 
- 
14,116 
22 
4,351 
799 
- 
19,288 

3,609 
7 
2,784 
- 
(507) 
(524) 
5,369 
17 
3,172 
8,558 

307 
4 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
311 
9 
- 
- 
- 
320 

79 
3 
84 
- 
- 
- 
166 
7 
85 
258 

-  149,643 
22 
- 
3,868 
- 
254 
- 
14 
- 
(1,694) 
- 
(713) 
- 
(14) 
- 
- 
49 
-  151,429 
31 
- 
6,838 
273 
8,667 
- 
(5) 
- 
273  166,960 

- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 
(1) 
160 
159 

26,889 
10 
8,615 
5 
37,836 
(713) 
72,642 
25 
8,289 
80,956 

48,132 

12,816 

4,028 

10,122 

10,730 

62 

114 

86,004 

45,855 

13,330 

4,725 

5,985 

8,747 

145 

- 

78,787 

Cost  
At 1 November 2017 
Foreign exchange 
Additions 
Additions on acquisition 
Additions on hive-in 
Impairment 
Disposals 
Disposals on hive-in 
Fair value adjustment 
At 31 October 2018 
Foreign exchange 
Additions 
Additions on acquisition 
Disposals 
At 31 October 2019 

Amortisation 
At 1 November 2017 
Foreign exchange 
Amortisation for the year 
Additions on acquisition 
Impairment 
Disposals 
At 31 October 2018 
Foreign exchange 
Amortisation for the year 
At 31 October 2019 

Carrying amount at 31 October 
2019 

Carrying amount at 31 October 
2018 

Average remaining 
amortisation period (years) 

31 October 2019 

31 October 2018 

n/a 

n/a 

7.7 

7.0 

5.8 

5.5 

4.0 

2.0 

3.4 

3.1 

0.7 

1.7 

0.7 

n/a 

During  the  year,  goodwill  and  intangibles  were  reviewed  for  impairment  in  accordance  with  IAS  36,  ‘Impairment  of 
Assets’. An impairment charge of £Nil (2018: £31,455,000) was processed in the period in relation to the PSS division, 
£Nil (2018: £6,275,000) in relation to the Digital division and £Nil (2018: £1,800,000) in relation to the EIM division.  

86 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

12 INTANGIBLE ASSETS (CONTINUED) 

Impairment test for goodwill 
For this review, goodwill was allocated to individual Cash Generating Unit groupings (CGUs) on the basis of the Group’s 
operations  as  disclosed  in  the  segmental  analysis.  As  the  Board  reviews  results  on  a  segmental  level,  the  Group 
monitors  goodwill  on  the  same  basis.  This  was  previously  separated  as,  Local  Authority,  Transport,  Social  Care, 
Computer Aided Facilities Management and Health. 

The carrying value of goodwill by each CGU is as follows: 

Cash Generating Unit Groupings 

Public Sector Software 
Engineering Information Management 
Content 

2019 
£000 

30,737 
9,974 
7,421 
48,132 

2018 
£000 

28,468 
9,974 
7,413 
45,855 

The recoverable amount of all CGUs has been determined using value-in-use calculations. These calculations use pre-
tax cash flow projections based on financial budgets approved by management covering the next five financial years. 
The key assumptions used in the financial budgets relate to revenue and EBITDA growth targets. Cash flows beyond 
this  period  are  extrapolated  using  the  estimated  growth  rates  stated  below.  Growth  rates  are  reviewed  in  line  with 
historic actuals to ensure reasonableness and are based on an increase in market share.  

For value-in-use calculations, the growth rates and margins used to estimate future performance are based on financial 
year 2020 budgets (as approved by the Board) which is management’s best estimate of short term performance based 
on  an  assessment  of  market  opportunities  and  macro-economic  conditions.  In  the  year  to  31  October  2019,  the 
Weighted Average Cost of Capital for each CGU has been used as an appropriate discount rate to apply to cash flows. 
The same basis was used in the year to 31 October 2018. 

The assumptions used for the value-in-use calculations are as follows and are considered appropriate for each of the 
risk profiles of the respective CGUs: 

Cash Generating Unit Groupings 
Public Sector Software 
Engineering Information Management 
Content 

Discount 
rate  
Current 
year 
12.4% 
13.1% 
11.8% 

Compound 
Annual 
Growth 
Rate 
5.7% 
9.9% 
6.5% 

Long term 
growth rate  
Current 
year 
1.5% 
1.5% 
1.5% 

Discount 
rate 
Prior 
year 
11.7% 
13.9% 
12.2% 

Growth rate 
Prior year 
1.5% 
1.5% 
1.5% 

Individual Weighted Average Costs of Capital were calculated for each CGU and adjusted for the market’s assessment 
of the risks attaching to each CGUs cash flows. The Weighted Average Cost of Capital is recalculated at each period 
end.   

Management considered the level of intangible assets within the Group in comparison to the future budgets and have 
processed an impairment charge of £Nil within the year (2018: £39,530,000). The charge in FY18 was broken down on 
a divisional and then business unit level as; PSS Transport £6,079,000, Health £25,376,000, EIM £1,800,000, Digital 
£6,275,000. 

The  Group  has  conducted  sensitivity  analysis  on  the  impairment  test  of  each  CGU  and  the  group  of  units  carrying 
value.  Sensitivities  have  been  run  on  the  discount  rate  applied  and  management  are  satisfied  that  a  reasonable 
increase  in  the  discount  rate  used  would  not  lead  to  the  carrying  amount  of  each  CGU  exceeding  the  recoverable 
amount. 

Sensitivities have also been run on cash flow forecasts for all CGUs EBITDA by 10%. Management are satisfied that 
this change would not lead to the carrying amount of each CGU exceeding the recoverable amount. 

Sensitivities have also been run on cash flow forecasts for all CGUs reducing the growth rate to 0%. Management are 
satisfied that this change would not lead to the carrying amount of the PSS and Content CGU exceeding the recoverable 
amount. A growth rate of 4.9% in EIM would result in CGU carrying amount equalling its recoverable amount. A growth 
rate of less than 4.9% would result in an impairment in EIM. If growth rates reduced to 0% in EIM, this would cause its 
CGU carrying amount to exceed its recoverable amount by £5.0m which would result in an impairment in EIM. 

Management have further considered the CGUs for which prior period impairments were recorded to reduce the value-
in-use  of  those  CGUs  to  their  recoverable  amount,  and  how  such  carrying  values  are  subject  to  the  current  year 
sensitivities noted above.  

87 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

12 INTANGIBLE ASSETS (CONTINUED) 

Whilst the current year impairment reviews and sensitivities have not provided any indicators of further impairment on 
these  assets,  management  have  considered  whether  a  reversal  of  the  prior  period  impairment  is  required  and 
concluded this is not appropriate at this time due to the ongoing transformation and improvement of those businesses. 

13 INVESTMENTS 

The  investment  relates  to  a  22.5%  (2018:  22.5%)  shareholding,  of  membership  units,  in  Javaili  LLC  a  company 
incorporated in the USA, with a principal place of business of the UK. This investment was acquired as part of the 
acquisition of the 6PM Group in February 2017. 

14 DEFERRED TAX 

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are summarised as follows: 

Deferred tax assets 

Deferred tax liabilities (non-current) 

The movement in the year in the net deferred tax provision was as follows: 

At 1 November 
Opening adjustment re IFRS 15 
Credit to income for the year 
Adjustment for changes in rate 
Adjustment to prior year provision 
Other movements 
Arising on acquisition 
At 31 October 

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000 

1,368 

1,107 

(4,015) 
(2,647) 

(3,724) 
(2,617) 

2019 
£000 

(2,617) 
1,944 
(952) 
144 
(235) 
10 
(941) 
(2,647) 

2018 
£000 

(5,924) 
- 
1,035 
(452) 
(1) 
8 
2,717 
(2,617) 

The movement in deferred income tax assets and liabilities during the year is as follows: 

Share-
based 
payments 
£000 

Other 
temporary 
differences 
£000 

Tax losses 
carried 
forward 
£000 

Accelerated 
tax 
depreciation 
£000 

Total 
deferred 
tax asset 
£000 

Total 
deferred  
tax liability 
£000 

IFRS 15 
£000 

At 1 November 2017 
Charge to income 
Charge to equity 
Changes in rate 
Deferred tax 
recognised on 
acquisition 
At 31 October 2018 

At 1 November 2018 
Opening adjustment 
re IFRS 15 
Charge to income 
Charge to equity 
Changes in rate 
Deferred tax 
recognised on 
acquisition 
At 31 October 2019 

195 
(78) 
- 
(11) 

- 
106 

106 

- 
40 
- 
- 

- 
146 

41 
9 
- 
(8) 

- 
42 

42 

- 
4 
- 
- 

- 
46 

336 
(9) 
- 
20 

- 
347 

347 

- 
35 
- 
- 

- 
382 

514 
126 
- 
(28) 

- 
612 

612 

- 
(499) 
- 
- 

- 
113 

- 
- 
- 
- 

- 
- 

- 

1,086 
48 
- 
(27) 

(7,010) 
971 
- 
(402) 

- 
1,107 

2,717 
(3,724) 

1,107 

(3,724) 

2,025 
(1,344) 
- 
- 

2,025 
(1,764) 
- 
- 

- 
650 
- 
- 

- 
681 

- 
1,368 

(941) 
(4,015) 

88 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

14 DEFERRED TAX (CONTINUED) 

Deferred tax is recognised where there is evidence that there will be sufficient future profitability of Group companies 
in the required jurisdictions to utilise the unrelieved losses or timing difference that gives rise to the deferred tax. Such 
evidence includes profitability of these companies in the year, and an estimate on future profitability based on budgeted 
future  financial  performance.  The  deferred  tax  liability  relates  to  deferred  tax  on  intangible  assets  acquired  on 
acquisition of subsidiaries. 

15 FINANCIAL ASSETS AND LIABILITIES 

Categories of financial assets and liabilities  

The disclosures detailed below are as required by IFRS 7 ’Financial Instruments: Disclosures’. The carrying amounts 
presented on the Consolidated Balance Sheet relate to the following categories of assets and liabilities: 

Financial assets 

Financial assets measured at amortised cost: 
Non-current: 
Investment 

Current: 
Trade receivables, net 
Other receivables 
Contract receivables 
Cash and cash equivalents 

Financial liabilities 

Financial liabilities measured at amortised cost: 
Non-current: 
Bonds in issue 
Bank borrowings 

Current: 
Bank borrowings 
Trade and other payables 
Other liabilities 

Financial liabilities measured at fair value through profit or 
loss: 
Non-current: 
Other liabilities* 

Current: 
Other liabilities* 

Note 

13 

16 
16 
16 
17 

Note 

21 
22 

22 
18 
19 

19 

19 

2019 
£000 

18 
18 

8,822 
1,684 
7,164 
7,023 
24,693 

2019 
£000 

11,584 
- 
11,584 

21,809 
7,136 
2,862 
31,807 

74 
74 

381 
381 

Restated 
2018 
£000 

18 
18 

10,704 
952 
18,432 
5,534 
35,622 

Restated 
2018 
£000 

11,491 
22,505 
33,996 

3,289 
7,957 
1,898 
13,144 

- 
- 

750 
750 

*Hierarchy 3 being inputs for the asset or liability which are not based on observable market data. The current year liability relates to 
deferred consideration on the acquisition of Tascomi Limited and the acquisition of the Funding Solutions customer lists, the prior 
year liability relates to deferred consideration on the acquisition of Open Objects Limited. 

89 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

15 FINANCIAL ASSETS AND LIABILITIES (CONTINUED) 

The  Group’s  financial  liabilities  per  the  fair  value  hierarchy  classifications  under  IFRS  13  ‘Financial  Instruments: 
Disclosures’ are described below: 

Fair value at 
31 October 
2019 
£000 

455 

Category of 
financial 
liability 

Contingent 
consideration 
due on 
acquisitions 

Level in 
hierarchy 

Description of 
valuation technique 

Inputs used for financial 
model 

3  Based on future 
revenue and 
probability that vendor 
will meet obligations 
under sale and 
purchase agreement 

Management estimate on 
probability and timescale 
of vendors meeting 
revenue targets specified 
in sale and purchase 
agreement 

Total gains 
recognised 
in profit or 

loss   
£000 

- 

There have been no changes to valuation techniques in the year. 

16 TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES 

Trade receivables, gross 
Allowance for credit losses 
Trade receivables, net 
Other receivables 
Contract receivables 
Financial assets 

Prepayments  
Non-financial assets 
Trade and other receivables due within one year 

2019 
£000 

8,891 
(69) 
8,822 
1,684 
7,164 
17,670 

2,302 
2,302 
19,972 

Restated 
2018 
£000 

10,908 
(204) 
10,704 
952 
18,432 
30,088 

2,414 
2,414 
32,502 

Total trade receivables (net of allowances) held by the Group at 31 October 2019 amounted to £8,822,000 (2018: 
£11,648,000),  comprising  the  amount  presented  above  of  £8,822,000  (2018:  £10,704,000)  and  trade  receivables 
classified as held for sale of £Nil (2018: £944,000). 

The carrying amount of trade and other receivables approximates to their fair value, which has been calculated based 
on  expectations  of  debt  recovery,  impairment  provision  calculations  are  based  on  historic  performances.  The 
implementation of IFRS 9 – Financial Instruments has had no material impact on the Group.  

The following table sets out expected credit losses of gross trade receivables at 31 October 2019: 

Expected credit loss rate 
Expected total gross carrying  amount at 
default (£000) 
Lifetime ECL 

Not 
past 
due 

1-30 
days 
past 
due 

31-60 
days 
past 
due 

61-90 
days 
past 
due 

>90 
days 
past 
due 

Total 

0.4% 

0.7% 

2.8% 

3.6% 

9.6% 

5,227 
23 

1,044 
7 

70 
2 

190 
7 

308 
30 

69 

90 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

16 TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES (CONTINUED) 

We have no expected credit loss scenarios in respect of our contract assets which are in respect of local authority 
entities. 

Trade receivables are reviewed regularly for impairment and judgement made as to any likely impairment based on 
historic trends and the latest communication with customers. 

Contract  receivables  represent  work  completed  and  delivered  to  the  customer  but  due  to  the  contractual  payment 
terms have not yet been invoiced. £5,866,000 (2018: £14,989,000) of the balance is in relation to deferred payment 
deals on local authority contracts, which typically have three to five year payment terms. The reduction in these Local 
Authority balances is due to the adjustment following adoption of IFRS 15 as at 1 November 2019. 

All of the closing Group trade receivables are in UK sterling with the exception of: 

Euros 
Australian Dollars 
US Dollars 
Canadian Dollars 
Norwegian Krone 
Polish Zloty 

2018 
2019 
€4,509,840 
€4,051,914 
AUD79,000 
AUD144,574 
$1,824,897 
$1,646,950 
CAD42,056  CAD322,000 
- 
PLZ1,000 

NOK660,300 
- 

Credit quality of financial assets 
The maximum exposure for the Group to credit risk for trade receivables at the reporting date by type of customer 
was: 

Local authorities and other public bodies 
Private companies 

The ageing of trade receivables at the reporting date for the Group was: 

2019 
£000 

4,109 
4,782 
8,891 

2018 
£000 

5,231 
5,677 
10,908 

Gross 
2019 
£000 

Impairment 
2019 
£000 

Gross 
2018 
£000 

Impairment 
2018 
£000 

Not past due 
Past due 0 to 30 days 
Past due 31 to 60 days 
More than 60 days 

6,436 
1,459 
52 
944 
8,891 

- 
- 
- 
69 
69 

Movements in the provision for impairment of receivables for the Group were as follows: 

At 1 November  
Charge for the year 
Utilised 
At 31 October  

7,954 
780 
343 
1,831 
10,908 

2019 
£000 

204 
197 
(332) 
69 

- 
- 
- 
204 
204 

2018 
£000 

564 
403 
(763) 
204 

The  provision  allowance  in  respect  of  trade  receivables  is  used  to  record  impairment  losses  unless  the  Group  is 
satisfied that no recovery of the amount owing is possible. At that point, the amounts are considered irrecoverable and 
are written off against the trade receivable directly. Where trade receivables are past due, an assessment is made of 
individual customers and the outstanding balance.   

91 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

17 CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS 

Cash at bank and in hand 
Cash and cash equivalents per cash flow statements 

The credit quality of the holders of the cash at bank is A and AA- rated.  

18 TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES 

Trade payables 
Accruals 

2019 
£000 

7,023 
7,023 

2018 
£000 

5,534 
5,534 

2019 
£000 

2,366 
4,770 
7,136 

Restated 
2018 
£000 

3,721 
4,236 
7,957 

Total trade payables held by the Group at 31 October 2019 amounted to £2,366,000 (2018: £3,874,000), comprising 
the amount presented above of £2,366,000 (2018: £3,721,000) and trade payables classified as held for sale of £Nil 
(2018: £153,000).  

The carrying values of trade and other payables are considered to be reasonable approximations of fair value. Accruals 
represent liabilities which have been recognised at the balance sheet date. The majority of these will be paid during 
the next six months. 

19 OTHER LIABILITIES 

Current: 
Social security and other taxes 
Other payables – deferred consideration 
Other payables 
Contract liabilities 
Other Liabilities payable within one year 

Other payables – deferred consideration 
Contract liabilities 
Other Liabilities payable after one year 

2019 
£000 

2,583 
381 
2,862 
18,447 
24,273 

74 
1,878 
1,952 

Restated 
2018 
£000 

2,732 
750 
1,898 
16,571 
21,951 

- 
1,288 
1,288 

Contract  liabilities  represents  software  revenue,  where  billing  milestones  have  been  reached  but  the  appropriate 
proportion of work has not been completed, and maintenance, managed service and subscription revenues that are 
spread over the period, typically one year, for which the service is supplied. Of the £17,425,000 contract liabilities 
present at 31 October 2018, £16,137,000 has been recognised as revenue in FY19. 

20 PROVISIONS 

At 1 November  
Provision made during the year 
Provision utilised during the year 
At 31 October  

2019 
£000 

734 
67 
(306) 
495 

Restated 
2018 
£000 

1,072 
8 
(346) 
734 

The opening and closing provisions relate to estimated dilapidation costs in relation to the exit of previously leased 
properties and an onerous contract. Of the full provision, £384,000 is expected to be payable during the year ending 
31 October 2020 and £111,000 is expected to be payable in the year ended 31 October 2021.  

92 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

21 BONDS IN ISSUE 

Bonds in issue are measured at amortised cost.  

130,000 bonds at €100 each 

2019 
£000 

11,584 
11,584 

2018 
£000 

11,491 
11,491 

The bonds were acquired following the acquisition of 6PM Holdings plc. The bonds were issued in 2015 at a nominal 
value of €100 each bearing interest at 5.1% per annum. They are redeemable at par value in 2025. Interest on the 
bonds is paid annually in arrears in July.  

The bonds are listed on the Official Companies List of the Malta Stock Exchange. At 31 October 2019 the bond was 
trading at 101% which equates to a fair value of £11,725,000. 

22 BORROWINGS 

All borrowings are held at amortised cost and after set-off for unamortised loan facility fees: 

Current: 
Bank borrowings 

Non-current: 
Bank borrowings 

Total borrowings 

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000 

21,809 

3,289 

- 

22,505 

21,809 

25,794 

Reconciliation of liabilities arising from financing activities: 

2019 

2018  

Bonds in 
issue 

Long-term 
borrowings 

Short-term 
borrowings 

Total 

Bonds in 
issue 

Long-term 
borrowings 

Short-term 
borrowings 

Total  

£000 

£000 

£000 

£000 

£000 

£000 

£000 

£000 

As at 1 November  

Cash movements: 
Repayment of 
borrowings 

New loans 

Non-cash 
movements: 

Movement in ageing 

Movement in 
amortisation 
Movement in foreign 
exchange rate 
Movement in EIR 
Adjustment  

As at 31 October  

11,491  

         22,505  

            3,289  

37,285  

11,238  

21,519 

3,102  

35,859  

-  

-  

-  

-  

69  

24  

(12,039)  

-  

(12,039)  

-  

         (5,500)  

-  

(5,500)  

-  

            8,000  

8,000  

-  

            6,500  

97  

6,597  

(10,466)  

         10,466  

-  

-  

-  

(54)  

(54)  

-  

69  

75  

-  

-  

-  

-  

-  

-  

               108  

132  

178  

(14)  

-  

90  

-  

-  

-  

90  

75  

164  

11,584  

         -  

         21,809  

33,393  

11,491  

         22,505  

3,289  

37,285  

93 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
   
   
   
   
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

22 BORROWINGS (CONTINUED) 

At the balance sheet date, the Group had two loan facilities in place through a two-bank facility with Royal Bank of 
Scotland and Silicon Valley Bank. The facilities consist of a term loan of £5.75m (2018: £7.0m) and a revolving credit 
facility of £23m (2018: £23m). 

During the period the loan was held, the average interest rate on the term loan was 3.75% (2018: 2.98%) and on the 
revolving credit facility was 3.67% (2018: 3.05%).  

There are unamortised loan fees of £54,000 (2018: £Nil) at the balance sheet date.  

As security for the above loans, Royal Bank of Scotland and Silicon Valley Bank hold a fixed and floating charge over 
the assets of Idox plc and certain subsidiaries, a guarantee supported by Idox plc and certain subsidiaries and a share 
pledge in respect of the entire issued share capital of each subsidiary company. 

The Directors estimate that the fair value of the Group’s borrowing is not significantly different to the carrying value. 

It was announced on 19 December 2019 that the Group had refinanced with the Royal Bank of Scotland plc, Silicon 
Valley Bank and Santander UK plc. The new facilities, which comprise a revolving credit facility of £35,000,000 and 
£10,000,000 accordion facility, are committed until December 2022, with an option to extend this commitment for a 
further two years. The interest payable on the new facilities ranges from 2.0% to 3.5%, plus LIBOR.  

23 RISK MANAGEMENT OBJECTIVES AND POLICIES 

The Group’s principal financial instruments comprise cash and cash equivalents, short term deposits, bonds and bank 
borrowings. The main purpose of these financial instruments is to finance the Group’s operations. The Group has other 
financial  instruments,  which  mainly  comprise  trade  receivables  and  trade  payables  that  arise  directly  from  its 
operations. 

Risk management is carried out by the finance department under policies approved by the Board. The Group’s finance 
department identifies, evaluates and manages financial risks.  

The Board provides guidance on overall risk management including foreign exchange risk, interest rate risk, credit risk 
and  investment  of  excess  liquidity.  The  Board  has  evaluated  the  risks  and  is  satisfied  that  the  risk  management 
objectives are met. 

The impact of the risks required to be discussed under IFRS 7 are detailed below: 

Market risk 
(i)  Foreign exchange risk 
Foreign exchange risk arises when future commercial transactions or recognised assets or liabilities are denominated 
in a currency that is not the functional currency of the operations. The Group has minimal exposure to foreign exchange 
risk as a result of natural hedges arising between sales and cost transactions. 

 Cash flow and fair value interest rate risk 

(ii) 
The  Group  is  exposed  to  interest  rate  risk  in  respect  of  cash  balances  held  with  banks  and  other  highly  rated 
counterparties. 

The Group’s main interest rate risk arises from its borrowings. Borrowings issued at variable rates expose the Group 
to cash flow interest rate risk. Borrowings issued at fixed rates expose the Group to fair value interest rate risk. During 
2019 and 2018, all the Group’s borrowings at variable rates were denominated in UK Sterling. The average interest 
rate during the year ended 31 October 2019 was 3.75% (2018: 2.98%) for the term loan and 3.67% (2018: 3.05%) for 
the revolving credit facility. Interest payable in the year was £850,000 (2018: £775,000). If the average interest rate 
during the year had been 1% different, this would have had an impact of £230,000 (2018: £256,000) on the interest 
payable during the year.  

94 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

23 RISK MANAGEMENT OBJECTIVES AND POLICIES (CONTINUED) 

Credit risk 
The Group’s maximum exposure to credit risk is limited to the carrying amount of financial assets recognised at the 
reporting date, as summarised below: 

Classes of financial assets – carrying amounts 

Cash and cash equivalents 
Trade receivables 
Contract receivables 
Other receivables 
Financial assets 

2019 
£000 

7,023 
8,822 
7,164 
1,684 
24,693 

Restated 
2018 
£000 

5,534 
10,704 
18,432 
952 
35,622 

Credit risk is managed on a Group basis. Credit risks arise from cash and cash equivalents and deposits with banks 
and financial institutions, as well as credit exposures to customers, including outstanding receivables and committed 
transactions.   

The  Group’s  credit  risk  is  primarily  attributable  to  its  trade  receivables.  It  is  the  policy  of  the  Group  to  present  the 
amounts in the balance sheet net of allowances for doubtful receivables, estimated by the Group’s management based 
on prior experience and the current economic environment. The Group reviews the reliability of its customers on a 
regular basis and these reviews take into account the nature of the Group’s trading history with the customer. 

The  credit  risk  on  liquid  funds  is  limited  because  the  majority  of  funds are  held  with  banks  with  high  credit-ratings 
assigned by international credit-rating agencies. Management does not expect any losses from non-performance of 
these counterparties. 

None of the Group’s financial assets are secured by collateral or other credit enhancements. 

Liquidity risk 
The Group closely monitors its access to bank and other credit facilities in comparison to its outstanding commitments 
on a regular basis, to ensure that it has sufficient funds to meet obligations of the Group as they fall due. 

The Board receives regular debt management forecasts, which estimate the cash inflows and outflows over the next 
twelve months, so that management can ensure that sufficient financing is in place as it is required.  

Detailed analysis of the debt facilities taken out and available to the Group are disclosed in note 22.   

As at 31 October 2019, the Group’s financial liabilities have contractual maturities (including interest payments where 
applicable) as summarised below: 

Within 1 
month 
£000 

Current 

1 - 3 
 months 
£000 

3 - 12 
months 
£000 

Non-current 
1 - 5  
years 
£000 

Later than 5 
years 
£000 

Bonds in issue 
Bank borrowings 
Trade and other payables 

- 
64 
3,978 

- 
22,057 
2,970 

444 
- 
39 

2,370 
- 
130 

12,229 
- 
19 

This compares to the maturity of the Group’s financial liabilities in the previous restated reporting period as follows: 

Bonds in issue 
Bank borrowings 
Trade and other payables 

Within 1 
month 
£000 

- 
838 
7,337 

Current 

1 - 3 
 months 
£000 

3 - 12 
months 
£000 

Non-current 
1 - 5  
years 
£000 

Later than 5 
years 
£000 

- 
1,436 
151 

440 
1,744 
66 

2,356 
22,795 
180 

12,670 
- 
223 

The above amounts reflect the contractual undiscounted cash flows, which may differ from the carrying values of the 
liabilities at the reporting date. 

95 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

23 RISK MANAGEMENT OBJECTIVES AND POLICIES (CONTINUED) 

Capital risk management 
The Group’s objectives when managing capital are to safeguard the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern, in 
order  to  provide  returns  for  shareholders  and  benefits  for  other  stakeholders,  and  to  maintain  an  optimal  capital 
structure to reduce the cost of capital. In order to maintain or adjust the capital structure, the Group may adjust the 
amount of dividends paid to shareholders, return capital to shareholders, issue new shares or sell assets to reduce 
debts. 

Capital for the reporting periods under review is summarised as follows: 

Total equity 
Less unrestricted cash and cash equivalents (note 17) 

Total equity 
Bonds in issue (note 21) 
Borrowings (note 22) 

Capital-to-overall-financing ratio 

24 SHARE CAPITAL 

Authorised: 
650,000,000 ordinary shares of 1p each  

Allotted, called up and fully paid: 
As at 1 November  
Issued and allotted during the year 

444,631,006 ordinary shares of 1p each (2018: 416,908,167) 

2019 
£000 

44,611 
(7,023) 
37,588 

44,611 
11,584 
21,809 
78,004 

Restated 
2018 
£000 

47,868 
(5,534) 
42,334 

47,868 
11,491 
25,794 
85,153 

0.48 

0.50 

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000 

6,500 

6,500 

4,169 
277 

4,446 

4,145 
24 

4,169 

Movement in issued share capital in the year 
During the year to 31 October 2019, two employees exercised share options across three separate exercises. To 
satisfy the exercise of these transactions, the Company issued and allotted 1,757,927 new ordinary shares of 1p 
each.  

During the year, the Company issued 25,964,912 new 1p ordinary shares at a cost of 28.5p per share, as part of 
a placing in respect of the acquisition of Tascomi Limited. 

The Company has one class of ordinary share which carries no right to fixed income. 

At 31 October 2019, there were 3,018,545 (2018: 3,190,648) shares in issue under ESOP. During the year, the 
average issue share price was 33p (2018: 35p). 

At 31 October 2019, there were 1,491,219 (2018: 1,491,219) shares held in treasury. 

96 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

25 SHARE OPTIONS    

The Company has an unapproved share option scheme for all employees (including Directors). All share options are 
exercisable at a price equal to the average market price of the Company's shares on the date of grant. The vesting 
period is typically quarterly from the date of grant, and at the discretion of the Board. Per the contractual agreements, 
the options are settled in equity once exercised. 

An Employee Share Investment Trust is in place to allow employees a tax efficient way of investing in the Company. 
The  Company  purchases  matching  shares  which  become  the  property  of  the  employee  after  a  three  year  vesting 
period.  

Details of all share options over 1p Ordinary shares, falling within the measurement and recognition criteria of IFRS 2 
“Share-based Payment” and forming part of the unapproved share scheme, including their contractual life and exercise 
prices, are as follows: 

At start of 
year 

1,365,854 

2,000,000 

340,000 

180,000 

200,000 

446,668 

800,000 

2,395,000 

700,000 

- 
8,427,522 

Granted 

Exercised 

Lapsed 

At end of 
year 

Exercise  
price 

Exercise 
date from 

Exercise 
date to 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(682,927) 

(1,000,000) 

- 

- 

682,927 

10.25p 

Mar 2010  Mar 2020 

1,000,000 

20.00p 

Mar 2011  Mar 2021 

(75,000) 

(150,000) 

115,000 

18.00p 

Mar 2011  Mar 2021 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(180,000) 

- 

35.00p 

Apr 2012  Apr 2022 

- 

200,000 

35.75p 

Jul 2013 

Jul 2023 

(296,668) 

150,000 

39.00p 

Jul 2014 

Jun 2024 

(800,000) 

- 

38.38p 

Feb 2015  Feb 2025 

(1,870,000) 

525,000 

50.00p 

Apr 2016  Apr 2026 

(300,000) 

400,000 

50.00p 

Apr 2016  Apr 2026 

585,500 
585,500 

- 
(1,757,927) 

- 
(3,596,668) 

585,500 
3,658,427 

1.00p 

Mar 2019  Mar 2029 

The following table sets out the number of share options and associated weighted average exercise price (WAEP) 
outstanding during the year: 

Outstanding at the beginning of the year 
Granted during the year 
Exercised during the year 
Lapsed during the year 
Outstanding at the end of the year 
Exercisable at the end of the year 

2019 

2018 

No. 
8,427,522 
585,500 
(1,757,927) 
(3,596,668) 
3,658,427 
3,658,427 

WAEP 
Pence 
32.80 
1.00 
16.13 
44.42 
24.30 
24.30 

No. 
8,971,424 
- 
(543,902) 
- 
  8,427,522 
8,427,522 

WAEP 
Pence 
31.75 
- 
15.44 
- 
32.80 
32.80 

The share options outstanding at the end of the year have a weighted average remaining contractual life of 4 years. 
The share options exercised during the year had a weighted average exercise price of 16.13p and a weighted average 
market price of 31.00p. 

585,500 share options were granted during the year ended 31 October 2019. 

The fair values were calculated using the Black-Scholes Pricing Model and the following information: 

Date of 
issue 

Mar 19 

Number 
granted 
No. 
585,500 

Weighted 
average 
share 
price 
Pence 
33.7 

Weighted 
average 
exercise 
price 
Pence 
1.00 

Expected 
volatility 
% 
37.00 

Expected 
life 
Years 
3 

Risk 
free 
rate 
% 
0.75 

Expected 
dividend 
yield 
% 
- 

Weighted 
average 
fair value 
at grant 
date 
£ 
0.30 

97 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

25 SHARE OPTIONS (CONTINUED)    

The Group recognised a total charge of £175,650 (2018: £6,000) for equity-settled share-based payment transactions 
related to the unapproved share option scheme during the year. The charge of £175,650 (2018: £6,000) related to 
share options granted and £Nil (2018: £Nil) related to share options exercised.  

Long-Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) 

During the year, 9,157,982 options were granted under the Long-Term Incentive Plan.  

The Group recognised a total charge of £683,731 (2018: £44,000) for equity-settled share-based payment transactions 
related to the LTIP during the year. The total cost was in relation to share options granted.     

The number of options in the LTIP scheme is as follows: 

Outstanding at the beginning of the year 

Granted 

Forfeited 

Vested 

Outstanding at the end of the year 

Exercisable at the end of the year 

2019 
No.  

2018 
No. 

- 

3,600,000 

9,157,982 

(728,572) 

- 

8,429,410 

- 

- 

(1,700,000) 

(1,900,000) 

- 

- 

98 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

26 ACQUISITIONS 

Tascomi Limited 

On 9 August 2019, the Group acquired the entire share capital of Tascomi Limited (Tascomi).  

Tascomi is a cloud-native supplier of solutions to Local Authority property and environmental services markets, and 
will complement the Group’s existing Local Authority business within the PSS division. 

Goodwill arising on the acquisition of Tascomi has been capitalised and consists largely of the value of the workforce, 
synergies and economies of scale expected from combining the operations of Tascomi with Idox. None of the goodwill 
recognised is expected to be deductible for income tax purposes. The purchase of Tascomi has been accounted for 
using the acquisition method of accounting. 

Book value 
£000 

Fair value 
£000 

799 
83 
162 
- 
2 
1,046 

(239) 
(37) 
(661) 
(303) 
- 

(1,240) 

Intangible Assets 
Property, plant and equipment 
Trade receivables 
Other receivables 
Cash at bank 
Total Assets 

Trade payables 
Other liabilities  
Contract liabilities 
Social security and other taxes 
Deferred tax liability 

Total Liabilities 
Net Assets 

Goodwill arising on acquisition 

Purchased customer relationships capitalised 

Purchased software capitalised 

Total consideration 

Satisfied by: 

Cash to vendor 

Earn out consideration 

Total consideration 

799 
50 
207 
8 
2 
1,066 

(239) 
- 
(875) 
(160) 
(941) 

(2,215) 
(1,149) 

2,269 

1,151 

4,448 

6,719 

6,394 

325 

6,719 

The revenue included in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income since 9 August 2019 contributed by 
Tascomi was £536,000. Tascomi also made a profit after tax of £127,000 for the same period. If Tascomi had been 
included  from  1  November  2018,  it  would  have  contributed  £2,144,000  to  Group  revenue  and  a  profit  after  tax  of 
£507,000. 

Acquisition costs of £174,000 have been written off in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income. 

99 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

27 OPERATING LEASE COMMITMENTS 

The future aggregate minimum lease payments under non-cancellable operating leases are as follows: 

Amounts due: 

Within one year 
Between one and five years 
After five years 

2019 
£000 

1,236 
2,239 
22 
3,497 

2018 
£000 

2,162 
5,422 
2,756 
10,340 

Operating lease payments represent rentals payable by the Group for office premises, motor vehicle leasing charges 
and equipment. 

28 CAPITAL COMMITMENTS 

We are committed to pay a supplier £950,000 in December 2019 in relation to the usage of Software Licences.  

29 CONTINGENT LIABILITIES  

There were no material Group contingent liabilities at 31 October 2019 or 31 October 2018. 

30 RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS 

Compensation paid to key management (which comprises the Executive Management Team and the Board) of 
the Group: 

Salaries and other short-term employee benefits including NIC 
Post-employment benefits 
Share-based payments 

2019 
£000 

2,513 
63 
684 
3,260 

2018 
£000 

2,160 
68 
44 
2,272 

During the year ended 31 October 2019, no Directors and one member of the Executive Management Team exercised 
share options resulting in a taxable gain of £251,707. Two Directors and no members of the Executive Management 
Team exercised share options resulting in a taxable gain of £628,623 in the year ended 31 October 2018.  

Details of the remuneration for each Director are included in the Report on Remuneration, which can be found on 
pages 30 to 31 but does not form part of the audited accounts. 

31 POST BALANCE SHEET EVENTS 

Refinancing 
It was announced on 19 December 2019 that the Group had refinanced with the Royal Bank of Scotland plc, Silicon 
Valley Bank and Santander UK plc. The new facilities, which comprise a revolving credit facility of £35,000,000 and 
£10,000,000 accordion facility, are committed until December 2022, with an option to extend this commitment for a 
further two years.  

Disposal of SIX-PM Health Solutions (Ireland) Limited 
The  Group  agreed  on  22  November  2019  to  sell  its  shareholding  in  SIX-PM  Health  Solutions  (Ireland)  Limited,  a 
medical-record  scanning  business  based  in  Limerick,  to  its  Managing  Director  for  €1.  During  the  year  ended  31 
October  2019  6PM  Ireland  Limited  recorded  revenues  of  €392,000  (2018:  €587,000)  and  loss  before  tax  on  a 
standalone basis of €378,000 (2018: €12,000 loss). 

Disposal of emCare Business 
On 31 December 2019, the Group sold the trade and assets of its emCare business to Go plc, a telecoms business 
based  in  Malta,  for  cash  consideration  of  €100,000.  During  the  year  ended  31  October  2019  emCare  business 
recorded revenues of €317,000 (2018: €338,000) and profit before tax of €128,000 (2018: €115,000). Despite the 
profitability recorded in the business in FY18 & FY19, the business was anticipated to become loss-making for the 
foreseeable future. 

100 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Accounts (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

31 POST BALANCE SHEET EVENTS (CONTINUED) 

UK Corporation Tax 
On the 11 March 2020, the UK Government announced its intention to scrap its planned reduction of UK corporation 
tax from its current rate of 19% to a reduced rate of 17%, starting 1 April 2020. The Group’s UK deferred tax assets 
and liabilities at 31 October 2019 are measured at 17%, being the rate previously announced and enacted at the 
balance sheet  date. The  impact on  our deferred tax  balances had they  been recognised at the revised rate  is as 
follows: 

Deferred tax assets 
Deferred tax liabilities 

Current 
at 17% 
£000 

Revised 
to 19% 
£000 

1,368 
(4,015) 
(2,647) 

1,529 
(4,487) 
(2,958) 

Covid-19 Pandemic 
The Group continues to monitor the impact of the Covid-19 pandemic. Idox is well placed because of the Group's 
high recurring revenue base, its focus on public sector markets and the high proportion of staff that routinely work 
from home.  

Further  details  of  our  assessment  of  the  impact  of  the  Covid-19  pandemic  on  the  Group  is  included  in  the  Going 
Concern disclosures in the Directors’ Report on pages 28 and 29. 

101 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Company Balance Sheet 

At 31 October 2019 
__________________________________________________________________________________ 

Note 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

Non-current assets 
Investments 

Current assets 
Debtors: falling due within one year 

Creditors: amounts falling due within 
one year 

Net current liabilities 

Total assets less current liabilities 

Creditors: amounts falling due after 
more than one year 

Net assets 

Capital and reserves 
Called up share capital 
Capital redemption reserve 
Share premium account 
Other reserve 
Treasury reserve 
Share option reserve 
Retained earnings 
Shareholders’ funds 

2019 
£000 

98,290 
98,290 

2018 
£000 

91,924 
91,924 

292 

58 

(41,818) 

(41,526) 

56,764 

- 

56,764 

4,446 
1,112 
41,348 
6,234 
(621) 
1,834 
2,411 
56,764 

(16,766) 

(16,708) 

75,216 

(22,505) 

52,711 

4,169 
1,112 
34,188 
6,234 
(621) 
1,228 
6,401 
52,711 

The parent company has taken advantage of section 408 of the Companies Act 2006 and has not included its own 
profit and loss account in these financial statements. The parent company’s loss for the year was £4,244,000 (2018: 
£30,400,000 loss).   

The financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors and authorised for issue on 9 April 2020 and are 
signed on its behalf by: 

David Meaden 
Chief Executive Officer 
9 April 2020 

The accompanying accounting policies and notes form an integral part of these Company financial statements. 

Company name: Idox plc    

Company number: 03984070

102 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Company Statement of Changes in Equity 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

At 31 October 2017 
Issue of share capital 
Share options reserve movement 
Exercise of options  
Lapse of options 
Dividends paid 

Transactions with owners 

Loss for the year 
Total comprehensive loss for the 
year 

At 31 October 2018 
Issue of share capital 

Share options reserve movement 
Exercise of options  
Lapse of options  

Transactions with owners 

Loss for the year 
Total comprehensive loss for the 
year 

Called-up 
share capital 
£000 
4,145 
24 
- 
- 
- 
- 

Capital 
redemption 
reserve 
£000 
1,112 
- 
- 
- 
- 

24 

- 

- 

4,169 
277 

- 
- 
- 

277 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

1,112 
- 

- 
- 
- 

- 

- 

- 

Share 
premium 
account 
£000 
34,109 
79 
- 
- 
- 
- 

79 

- 

- 

34,188 
7,160 

- 
- 
- 

7,160 

- 

- 

Other  
reserve 
£000 
6,234 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

- 

- 

- 

6,234 
- 

- 
- 
- 

- 

- 

- 

Treasury 
reserve 
£000 
(621) 
- 
- 
- 
- 
- 

- 

- 

- 

(621) 
- 

- 
- 

- 

- 

- 

Share  
option 
reserve 
£000 
1,726 
- 
(498) 
- 
- 
- 

(498) 

- 

- 

1,228 
- 

606 
- 
- 

606 

- 

- 

At 31 October 2019 

4,446 

1,112 

41,348 

6,234 

(621) 

1,834 

Retained 
earnings 
£000 
38,970 
- 
- 
310 
238 
(2,717) 

(2,169) 

(30,400) 

(30,400) 

6,401 
- 

- 
146 
108 

254 

(4,244) 

(4,244) 

2,411 

Total 
£000 
85,675 
103 
(498) 
310 
238 
(2,717) 

(2,564) 

(30,400) 

(30,400) 

52,711 
7,437 

606 
146 
108 

8,297 

(4,244) 

(4,244) 

56,764 

103 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Company Financial Statements 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

1 COMPANY INFORMATION 
Idox plc is a company which is incorporated and domiciled in the UK, which is its principal place of business. The 
address of its registered office is 2nd Floor, 1310 Waterside, Arlington Business Park, Theale, Reading, RG7 4SA. 
The registered number of the Company is 03984070. 

2 ACCOUNTING POLICIES 
Basis of preparation 
These  financial  statements  have  been  prepared  in  accordance  with  applicable  accounting  standards  and  in 
accordance with Financial Reporting Standard 101 – ‘The Reduced Disclosure Framework’ (FRS 101). The principal 
accounting policies adopted in preparation of these financial statements are set out below. These policies have all 
been applied consistently throughout the year unless otherwise stated. 

The financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention as modified by the revaluation of 
certain financial assets and liabilities, being, deferred consideration at fair value through profit or loss. 

These financial statements are separate financial statements for Idox plc the Company.  

The financial statements are prepared in pounds sterling. 

Disclosure exemptions adopted 
In preparing these financial statements the Company has taken advantage of all disclosure exemptions conferred by 
FRS 101. Therefore, these financial statements do not include: 

  A statement of cash flows and related notes. 
  Disclosure of key management personnel compensation. 
  Certain disclosures in relation to share based payments. 
  Disclosures in relation to impairment of assets. 
 

The effect of future accounting standards not adopted. 

Judgements and estimates  
Management assess critical judgements and estimates in line with the Financial Reporting Council’s (“FRC”) guidance. 
The Directors are required to make judgements (other than those involving estimations) that have a significant impact 
on  the  amounts  recognised  and  to  make  estimates  and  assumptions  about  the  carrying  amounts  of  assets  and 
liabilities that are not easily apparent from other sources. The estimates and associated assumptions are based on 
historical  experience  and  other  factors  that  are  considered  to  be  relevant.  Actual  results  may  differ  from  these 
estimates. 

The estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting estimates are 
recognised in the period in which the estimate is revised if the revision affects only that period, or in the period of the 
revision and future periods if the revision affects both current and future periods. 

Key sources of estimation uncertainty 
Management consider the following items to involve key assumptions and other sources of estimation uncertainty. 
These items generate a significant risk of causing a material adjustment to the carrying amount of assets and liabilities 
in the next financial year. 

Impairment of investments 
Management  considers,  at  least  annually,  whether  investments  have  suffered  any  impairment.  The  recoverable 
amount  is  determined  based  upon  value-in-use  and  net  realisable  value  calculations.  The  value-in-use  method 
requires the calculation of future cash flows and the choice of a suitable discount rate in order to calculate the present 
value of these cash flows. Pre-tax discount rates have been applied and are based on WACC calculations performed 
and supplied by independent valuation specialists.  

104 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Company Financial Statements (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

2 ACCOUNTING POLICIES (CONTINUED) 

Share based payment 
All share-based payment arrangements granted after 7 November 2002 that had not vested prior to 1 November 2006 
are recognised in the financial statements. 

All  goods  and  services  received  in  exchange  for  the  grant  of  any  share-based  payment  are  measured  at  their  fair 
values.  Where  employees  are  rewarded  using  share-based  payments,  the  fair  values  of  employees'  services  are 
determined  indirectly  by  reference  to  the  fair  value  of  the  instrument  granted  to  the  employee.  This  fair  value  is 
appraised at the grant date and excludes the impact of non-market vesting conditions (for example, profitability and 
sales growth targets). 

Employees to whom share options have been granted provide their services in subsidiary companies of Idox plc. All 
equity  settled  share-based  payments  are  recognised  as  an  expense  in  the  profit  and  loss  account  of  the  relevant 
subsidiary company. In Idox plc, the cost is allocated to investments in subsidiaries. 

If vesting periods or other non-market vesting conditions apply, the expense is allocated over the vesting period, based 
on the best available estimate of the number of share options expected to vest. Estimates are revised subsequently if 
there  is  any  indication  that  the  number  of  share  options  expected  to  vest  differs  from  previous  estimates.  Any 
cumulative adjustment prior to vesting is recognised in  the current period. No adjustment is made to any expense 
recognised in prior periods if share options that have vested are not exercised. 

Upon exercise of share options, the proceeds received net of attributable transaction costs are credited to reserves. 

Investments 
Fixed  asset  investments  in  subsidiary  undertakings  are  stated  at  cost  less  provision  for  impairment.  If  there  is  a 
subsequent change in the total consideration paid, such as a refund received from the seller, then the Company will 
recognise an adjustment to the acquisition price which will reduce the cost, and consequently the net book value, of 
that investment.  

Financial instruments 
Financial liabilities and equity instruments are classified according to the substance of the contractual arrangements 
entered into. An equity instrument is any contract that evidences a residual interest in the assets of the entity after 
deducting all of its financial liabilities. 

Where  the  contractual  obligations  of  financial  instruments  (including  share  capital)  are  equivalent  to  a  similar  debt 
instrument, those financial instruments are classed as financial liabilities. Financial liabilities are presented as such in 
the balance sheet.  

Share  capital  is  classed  as  an  equity  instrument  where  the  contractual  terms  do  not  have  any  terms  meeting  the 
definition of a financial liability. Dividends and distributions relating to equity instruments are debited direct to equity. 

Interest and expenditure arising on financial instruments is recognised on the accruals basis and credited or charged 
to the profit and loss account in the financial period to which it relates. 

Reserves 
Equity comprises the following: 

 

 

 

 

 

 

“Capital redemption reserve” for the Company was created during 2003 when the entire deferred ordinary 
share capital was bought in exchange for one ordinary 1p share.   
"Share premium" represents the excess over nominal value of the fair value of consideration received for 
equity shares, net of expenses of the share issue. 
“Other reserves” arose as a result of share premium arising on consideration shares issued on the acquisition 
of 6PM Holdings plc and Halarose Holdings Limited. 
Treasury  reserve”  represents  shares  repurchased  by  the  Company  to  be  held  for  redistribution  as  share 
options. The cost of treasury shares is debited to the Treasury reserve. 
“Share options reserve” represents shares to be issued on potential exercise of those share options that have 
been accounted for under FRS 101. 
 “Retained earnings” represents retained profits. 

105 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Company Financial Statements (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

3 DIRECTORS AND EMPLOYEES 

There are no wages and salaries paid by the parent company. 

The  Company  has  no  employees  and  Directors  are  remunerated  by  other  Group  companies.  Details  of  the 
remuneration for each Director are included in the Report on Remuneration which can be found on pages 30 to 31 but 
which do not form part of the audited accounts. 

4 DIVIDENDS 

Final dividend paid in respect of the year ended 31 October 2019  
and 31 October 2018 

Pence per ordinary share 

Interim dividend paid in respect of the year ended 31 October 2019  
and 31 October 2018 

Pence per ordinary share 

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000 

- 

- 

- 

- 

2,717 

0.655p 

- 

- 

The Directors have proposed the payment of a final dividend of £Nil per share, which would amount to £Nil (2018: 
£Nil). 

5 PROFIT FOR THE FINANCIAL YEAR 

The  parent  company’s  loss  for  the  year  was  £4,244,000  (2018:  £30,400,000  loss).  During  the  prior  year,  the  Idox 
Group performed a review of intercompany balances and elected to waive various balances. This resulted in a credit 
of £1,509,000 to the Company’s loss for the year ended 31 October 2018. 

6 INVESTMENTS 

Cost or market value 
At 1 November 2018 
Additions 
Disposals 
At 31 October 2019 

Impairment 
At 1 November 2018 
Provided in the year 
At 31 October 2019 

Net book amount 
At 31 October 2019 

At 31 October 2018 

Investment in 
Group 
undertakings 
£000 

126,007 
7,587 
(1,221) 
132,373 

34,083 
- 
34,083 

98,290 

91,924 

The Group has performed impairment reviews in respect of the assets of all its CGUs as disclosed in note 12 of the 
Group’s financial statements.  

The  Company’s  investments  in  Group  undertakings  associated  with  its  EIM  and  Content  CGUs  have  comparable 
carrying values to the carrying values of the assets of those CGUs, and therefore, sensitivity of impairment reviews 
against value-in-use calculations is also comparable.  

The Company’s investments in Group undertakings associated with its PSS CGUs has a higher carrying value than 
the carrying value of the assets of the PSS CGUs, however, headroom of impairment reviews against value-in-use 
calculations is significant in both cases. 

106 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Company Financial Statements (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

6 INVESTMENTS (CONTINUED) 

Any  comparable  movement  in  sensitivity  which  resulted  in  an  impairment  of  intangibles  would  result  in  a  similar 
impairment to investments. However, at present there is no significant risk of an impairment to the investment values 
unless there was a movement in the EIM growth rate as disclosed in note 12 of the Group’s financial statements. 

At 31 October 2019 the Company held investments in the following companies (* indirect holdings): 

Country of 
registration 

Registered office 

Class of 
share 
held  

Proportion 
held 

Nature of 
business 

Idox Trustees Limited 

England 

Idox Software Limited  

England 

Idox Belgium NV 

Belgium 

Idox Netherlands BV 

Netherlands 

Idox Germany GmbH 

Germany 

McLaren Software 
Limited 

Scotland 

McLaren Software Inc 

USA 

Idox France SARL 

France 

Idox India Private 
Limited* 

India 

McLaren Software 
Group Limited 
McLaren Software 
GmbH* 

Scotland 

Germany 

McLaren Consulting BV*  Netherlands 
McLaren Software 
SARL* 

Switzerland 

CT Space Inc 

USA 

Citadon Inc 

USA 

6PM Holdings plc 

Malta 

Halarose Holdings 
Limited 
Atlas Adviesgroep 
Twente B.V. 

England 

Netherlands 

Ordinary 

Ordinary 

Ordinary 

Ordinary 

Ordinary 

Ordinary 

2nd Floor, 1310 
Waterside, Arlington 
Business Park, Theale, 
Reading, RG7 4SA 
2nd Floor, 1310 
Waterside, Arlington 
Business Park, Theale, 
Reading, RG7 4SA 
1831 Machelen (Brab.), 
Pegasuslaan 5, Belgium  Ordinary 
Klavermaten 25, 7472 
DD Goor, the 
Netherlands 
Hauptstrabe 65, 12159 
Berlin, Germany 
72 Gordon Street, 
Glasgow, Scotland, G1 
3RS 
818 West Seventh St, 
2nd Floor, LA, CA 90017  Ordinary 
75, Avenue Parmentier, 
75544 Paris cedex 11, 
France 
Kapil Towers Sixth Floor 
C Wing Dr. Ambedkar 
Road Pune MH 411001 
India 
72 Gordon Street, 
Glasgow, Scotland, G1 
3RS 
Hauptstrabe 65, 12159 
Berlin, Germany 
Costerweg 5, 6702AA 
Wageningen 
Avenue Antoine-Henri-
Jomini 8 
1209 Orange Street, 
Corporation Trust 
Center, Wilmington, DE 
19801 
919 North Market St, 
Suite 950, Wilmington, 
DE 19801 
Idox Business Centre 
Triq it-Torri, Swatar 
Birkirkara 
2nd Floor, 1310 
Waterside, Arlington 
Business Park, Theale, 
Reading, RG7 4SA 
Klavermaten 25, 7472 
DD Goor, Netherlands 

Ordinary 

Ordinary 

Ordinary 

Ordinary 

Ordinary 

Ordinary 

Ordinary 

Ordinary 

Ordinary 

Ordinary 

100% 

100% 

100% 

100% 

Corporate trustee 
of Employee share 
ownership trust 

Software services 
Information 
services 

Information 
services 

100% 

Software services 

100% 

Software services 

100% 

Software services 

100% 

Software services 

100% 

Software services 

100% 

100% 

100% 

100% 

Holding Company 
Dormant 
Company 
Dormant 
Company 
Dormant 
Company 

100% 

Dormant Company 

100% 

Dormant Company 

100% 

Holding Company 

100% 

Dormant Company 

100% 

Software services 

107 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Company Financial Statements (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

6 INVESTMENTS (CONTINUED) 

Country of 
registration 

Registered office 

Class of 
share 
held 

Proportion 
held 

Nature of 
business 

3 Ballynahinch Street, 
Hillsborough, Northern 
Ireland BY26 6AW 
2nd Floor, 1310 
Waterside, Arlington 
Business Park, Theale, 
Reading, RG7 4SA 
GVZH Advocates, 192 
Old Bakery Street, 
Valletta, VLT 1455, 
Malta  
GVZH Advocates, 192 
Old Bakery Street, 
Valletta, VLT 1455, 
Malta  
Unit H, L.E.D.P., Roxboro, 
Limerick, Ireland  

GVZH Advocates, 192 
Old Bakery Street, 
Valletta, VLT 1455, 
Malta  
GVZH Advocates, 192 
Old Bakery Street, 
Valletta, VLT 1455, 
Malta  
GVZH Advocates, 192 
Old Bakery Street, 
Valletta, VLT 1455, 
Malta  
5,Vasil Gjorgov Street  
1000 Skopje, North 
Macedonia  
2nd Floor, 1310 
Waterside, Arlington 
Business Park, Theale 

Ordinary 
Ordinary 

100% 
100% 

Software services 
Dormant Company 

Ordinary 

100% 

Software services 

Ordinary 

100% 

Software services 

Ordinary 

100% 

Software services 

Ordinary 

100% 

Software services 

Ordinary 

100% 

Software services 

Ordinary 

100% 

Dormant Company 

Ordinary 

100% 

Software services 

Ordinary 

100% 

Software services 

Tascomi Limited 
Halarose Limited* 

Northern 
Ireland 
England 

6PM Limited* 

Malta 

6PM Infrastructure* 
Limited* 

Malta 

SIX-PM Health Solutions 
(Ireland) Limited* 
emCare360 Limited* 

Ireland 

Malta 

emCare Group Malta 
Limited* 

Malta 

6PM Agencies Limited* 

Malta 

Idox DOOEL* 

North 
Macedonia 

Idox Health Limited* 

England 

* Indirect holding 

7 DEBTORS 

Falling due within one year: 
Other debtors 
Amounts owed by Group undertakings 

8 CREDITORS: AMOUNTS FALLING DUE WITHIN ONE YEAR 

Bank loan 
Amounts owed to Group undertakings 
Other creditors 
Accruals 

Amounts owed to Group undertakings are interest bearing and are repayable on demand. 

2019 
£000 

232 
60 
292 

2019 
£000 

21,809 
19,391 
438 
180 
41,818 

2018 
£000 

- 
58 
58 

2018 
£000 

2,500 
13,006 
854 
406 
16,766 

108 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Company Financial Statements (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

9 CREDITORS: AMOUNTS FALLING DUE AFTER MORE THAN ONE YEAR 

Bank loan 

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000 

- 

22,505 

At the balance sheet date, the Group had two loan facilities in place through a two-bank facility with Royal Bank of 
Scotland and Silicon Valley Bank. The facilities consist of a term loan of £5.75m (2018: £7.0m) and a revolving credit 
facility of £23m (2018: £23m) and were in place to February 2020. 

During the period the loan was held, the average interest rate on the term loan was 3.75% (2018: 2.98%) and on the 
revolving credit facility was 3.67% (2018: 3.05%).  

There are unamortised loan fees of £54,000 (2018: £Nil) at the balance sheet date.  

An accounting adjustment of £108,000 (2018: £5,000) has been processed during the period to take into account the 
effective rate of interest on the bank facilities.  

As security for the above loans, Royal Bank of Scotland and Silicon Valley Bank hold a fixed and floating charge over 
the assets of Idox plc and certain subsidiaries, a guarantee supported by Idox plc and certain subsidiaries and a share 
pledge in respect of the entire issued share capital of each subsidiary company. 

The Directors estimate that the fair value of the Group’s borrowing is not significantly different to the carrying value. 

It was announced on 19 December 2019 that the Group had refinanced with the Royal Bank of Scotland plc, Silicon 
Valley Bank and Santander UK plc. The new facilities, which comprise a revolving credit facility of £35,000,000 and 
£10,000,000 accordion facility, are committed until December 2022, with an option to extend this commitment for a 
further two years.  

10 SHARE CAPITAL 

Authorised: 
650,000,000 ordinary shares of 1p each  

Allotted, called up and fully paid: 
As at 1 November  
Issued and allotted during the year 

444,631,006 ordinary shares of 1p each (2018: 416,908,167) 

2019 
£000 

2018 
£000 

6,500 

6,500 

4,169 
277 

4,446 

4,145 
24 

4,169 

Movement in issued share capital in the year 
During  the  year  to  31  October  2019,  two  employees  exercised  share  options  across  three  separate  exercises.  To 
satisfy the exercise of these transactions, the Company issued and allotted 1,757,927 new ordinary shares of 1p each.  

During  the  year,  the  Company  issued  25,964,912  new  1p  ordinary  shares  as  part  of  a  placing  in  respect  of  the 
acquisition of Tascomi Limited. 

The Company has one class of ordinary share which carries no right to fixed income. 

At  31  October  2019,  there  were  3,018,545  (2018:  3,190,648)  shares  in  issue  under  ESOP.  During  the  year,  the 
average issue share price was 33p (2018: 35p). 

At 31 October 2019, there were 1,491,219 (2018: 1,491,219) shares held in treasury. 

109 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Company Financial Statements (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

11 SHARE OPTIONS    

The Company has an unapproved share option scheme for all employees (including Directors). All share options are 
exercisable at a price equal to the average market price of the Company's shares on the date of grant. The vesting 
period is typically quarterly from the date of grant, and at the discretion of the Board. Per the contractual agreements, 
the options are settled in equity once exercised. 

An Employee Share Investment Trust is in place to allow employees a tax efficient way of investing in the Company. 
The  Company  purchases  matching  shares  which  become  the  property  of  the  employee  after  a  three  year  vesting 
period.  

Details of all share options over 1p Ordinary shares, falling within the measurement and recognition criteria of IFRS 2 
“Share-based Payment” and forming part of the unapproved share scheme, including their contractual life and exercise 
prices, are as follows: 

At start of 
year 

1,365,854 

2,000,000 

340,000 

180,000 

200,000 

446,668 

800,000 

2,395,000 

700,000 

- 
8,427,522 

Granted 

Exercised 

Lapsed 

At end of 
year 

Exercise  
price 

Exercise 
date from 

Exercise 
date to 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(682,927) 

(1,000,000) 

- 

- 

682,927 

10.25p 

Mar 2010  Mar 2020 

1,000,000 

20.00p 

Mar 2011  Mar 2021 

(75,000) 

(150,000) 

115,000 

18.00p 

Mar 2011  Mar 2021 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

- 

(180,000) 

- 

35.00p 

Apr 2012  Apr 2022 

- 

200,000 

35.75p 

Jul 2013 

Jul 2023 

(296,668) 

150,000 

39.00p 

Jul 2014 

Jun 2024 

(800,000) 

- 

38.38p 

Feb 2015  Feb 2025 

(1,870,000) 

525,000 

50.00p 

Apr 2016  Apr 2026 

(300,000) 

400,000 

50.00p 

Apr 2016  Apr 2026 

585,500 
585,500 

- 
(1,757,927) 

- 
(3,596,668) 

585,500 
3,658,427 

1.00p 

Mar 2019  Mar 2029 

The following table sets out the number of share options and associated weighted average exercise price (WAEP) 
outstanding during the year: 

Outstanding at the beginning of the year 
Granted during the year 
Exercised during the year 
Lapsed during the year 
Outstanding at the end of the year 
Exercisable at the end of the year 

2019 

2018 

No. 
8,427,522 
585,500 
(1,757,927) 
(3,596,668) 
3,658,427 
3,658,427 

WAEP 
Pence 
32.80 
1.00 
16.13 
44.42 
24.30 
24.30 

No. 
8,971,424 
- 
(543,902) 
- 
  8,427,522 
8,427,522 

WAEP 
Pence 
31.75 

15.44 

32.80 
32.80 

The share options outstanding at the end of the year have a weighted average remaining contractual life of 4 years. 
The share options exercised during the year had a weighted average exercise price of 16.13p and a weighted average 
market price of 31.00p. 

585,500 share options were granted during the year ended 31 October 2019. 

The fair values were calculated using the Black-Scholes Pricing Model and the following information: 

Date of 
issue 

Mar 19 

Number 
granted 
No. 
585,500 

Weighted 
average 
share 
price 
Pence 
33.7 

Weighted 
average 
exercise 
price 
Pence 
1.00 

Expected 
volatility 
% 
37.00 

Expected 
life 
Years 
3 

Risk 
free 
rate 
% 
0.75 

Expected 
dividend 
yield 
% 
- 

Weighted 
average 
fair value 
at grant 
date 
£ 
0.30 

110 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Company Financial Statements (continued) 

For the year ended 31 October 2019 
___________________________________________________________________ 

11 SHARE OPTIONS (CONTINUED) 

As  the  share  option  scheme  is  a  Group  scheme,  there  has  been  no  charge  recognised  in  the  parent  Company 
accounts.  

Long-Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) 

During the year, 9,157,982 options were granted under the Long-Term Incentive Plan.  

The Group recognised a total charge of £683,731 (2018: £44,000) for equity-settled share-based payment transactions 
related to the LTIP during the year. The total cost was in relation to share options granted.     

The number of options in the LTIP scheme is as follows: 

Outstanding at the beginning of the year 

Granted 

Forfeited 
Vested 

Outstanding at the end of the year 

Exercisable at the end of the year 

2019 

No.  

2018 

No. 

- 

3,600,000 

9,157,982 

(728,572) 
- 

8,429,410 

- 

- 

(1,700,000) 
(1,900,000) 

- 

- 

As the LTIP share option scheme is a Group scheme, there has been no charge recognised in the parent Company 
accounts.  

12 RELATED PARTY DISCLOSURES 

As permitted by FRS 101, related party transactions with wholly owned members of the Group and remuneration 
of key management personnel have not been disclosed.  

13 CAPITAL COMMITMENTS 

The Company had no capital commitments at 31 October 2019 or 31 October 2018.  

14 CONTINGENT LIABILITIES  

There were no material Company contingent liabilities at 31 October 2019 or 31 October 2018. 

15 ULTIMATE CONTROLLING PARTY 

There is no ultimate controlling party. 

111